JP7034469B2 - Cushioning material for packing - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a packing cushioning material for packing and transporting an article (commodity).

As a packing cushioning material, Patent Document 1 discloses an impact mitigation transport container. The impact mitigation transport container comprises a plurality (two) product holding members, each product holding member having a flexible film and a product pressing piece. For each product holding member, the fourth side piece of the unfolded paper piece is folded back to the back surface of the product pressing piece with the bent portion as a boundary, and the corner pieces at both ends of the fourth side piece are the back surfaces of the second and third side pieces. By sticking to, it can be assembled into a rectangular parallelepiped.
In the impact mitigation transport container, each product holding member is stacked one above the other, and the product is sandwiched and supported by a flexible film and a product pressing piece.

Utility Model Registration No. 3145636 Gazette

However, in Patent Document 1, it is necessary to fold and adhere a piece of paper to manufacture a plurality of product holding members, which complicates the packing work of articles.

The present invention is to provide a packing cushioning material that can easily and easily pack an article (commodity).

The first aspect of the present invention is a packing cushioning material having a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate side edges, and comprising a basic flat plate body having a predetermined plate thickness and a presser sheet. , The basic flat plate body is arranged in parallel on the upper edge of the plate with a space between upper plates, and is arranged in parallel on the lower edge of the plate with a space between lower plates, and a reference bending straight line intersecting each side edge of the plate. And a pair of reference cut straight lines having a cut length from each plate side edge and being formed on the reference bent straight line and penetrating the base plate body and opening to the front surface and the back surface of the base plate body. , The lower flat plate partitioned by the reference bent straight line, the lower edge of the plate and the side edges of each plate, and the reference bent straight line, the upper edge of the plate and the side edges of each plate. Each plate side edge is formed between a pair of plate upper edges located between the plate upper edge and the reference bending straight line, and between the plate lower edge and the reference bending straight line. It has a pair of lower plate edges located in, and the lower plate is arranged parallel to the lower edge of the plate and the reference bending straight line with a first spacing and a second spacing from each other. A pair of first bent straight lines arranged in parallel, the first bent straight line arranged on the lower edge of each plate at a third interval, and the reference bent straight line separated by the first interval, and the reference. A pair of second bent straight lines orthogonal to the notch straight line, and the first bent straight line arranged at the lower edge of each plate with the third interval between them and separated by the first interval at the lower edge of the plate. A pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge of the plate, and each of the second bent straight lines arranged between the lower edges of the plates at a fourth interval and between the lower edges of the plates. A pair of located parallel to each of the second folding straight lines and each of the third folding straight lines with a fifth interval, and orthogonal to each of the first folding straight lines. At each first intersection of the fourth bent straight line and the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval from the reference bent straight line, the fourth bent straight line becomes the fourth bent straight line. A pair of fifth bent straight lines extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edges of each plate at one sharp angle, and the said At each second intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval on the lower edge of the plate , the first sharp angle is formed on each of the fourth bent straight lines. Each second intersection has a reference bent straight line and a pair of sixth bent straight lines extending from each second intersection toward the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate. The loading flat plate portion partitioned by the bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines, and the loading flat plate portion formed on the loading flat plate portion, said to be A loading window hole that penetrates the loading flat plate portion and is opened on the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion, the reference bent straight line, the first bent straight line that separates the first interval from the reference bent straight line, and the said. A first lower leg flat plate portion that is partitioned by each second bent straight line and is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the first bent straight line that separates the first interval from the reference bent straight line. And the first bending straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , and the first bending straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate . It is divided into a second lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat surface portion, the fourth bent straight line, the fifth bent straight line, and the sixth bent straight line. , A pair of lower rising flat plate portions that are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along each of the 4th folded straight lines, and each of the 2nd bent straight lines and each of the 5th bent straight lines. A pair of first holders that are folded back to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion and raised to the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the second bent straight line and the fifth folded straight line. The flat plate portion is divided into each of the third folded straight lines and each of the sixth bent straight lines, and the lower rising flat plates are formed along the respective third folded straight lines and the respective sixth folded straight lines. It is composed of a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are folded back on the back surface of the portion and raised on the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion, and the upper flat plate has the surface of the upper flat plate directed toward the surface of the lower flat plate. Then, it is folded back to the surface of the lower flat plate along the reference bending straight line, arranged in parallel with the upper edge of the plate and the reference folding straight line at a distance of 6th, and arranged in parallel with each other at a distance of 7th. A pair of 7th bent straight lines and the upper edge of each plate are arranged at an eighth interval, and the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate are located between the upper edge of each plate and the second curved straight line of each plate. A pair of 8th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval on the upper edge of the plate, and the upper edge of each plate that is arranged on the upper edge of each plate with the 8th interval apart. And a pair of 9th folding straight lines located between the 2nd folding straight lines and orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval from the reference cut straight line and the reference bending straight line. The 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located on the upper edge of each plate at a distance of 9th, and the 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located between the upper edge of each plate and the 8th folding straight line. And a pair of 10th folding straight lines arranged in parallel with each of the 9th folding straight lines at a distance of 10 and orthogonal to each of the 7th folding straight lines, and on the plate upper edge and the plate upper edge. The 7th bend separated by the 6th interval At each first base point on the extension of each tenth folding straight line extending between the straight lines, a second sharp angle is formed on each tenth folding straight line, and the reference is made from each first base point. It is located between the pair of eleventh bent straight lines extending toward the bent straight line and the upper edge of each plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate, and the eleventh bent straight line and the upper edge of the plate. A pair of twelfth folding straight lines that are arranged in parallel to each of the eleventh folding straight lines with a thirteenth interval equal to or larger than the plate thickness and intersect the upper edge of each plate and each of the eighth folding straight lines, and the above. At each second base point on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the reference folding straight line and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the reference folding straight line, each of the above. A pair of thirteenth lines extending from each of the second base points toward the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of the plate at the second sharp angle on the tenth bending straight line and intersecting the upper edge of each plate. It is located between the bent straight line, the reference bent straight line and each of the thirteenth bent straight lines, and is arranged in parallel with each of the thirteenth bent straight lines at the thirteenth interval, and the upper edge of each plate and the said. A presser plate portion having a pair of 14th folding straight lines intersecting each 9th folding straight line, and being partitioned by each of the 7th folding straight lines and the 10th folding straight lines, and the pressing flat plate. A presser window hole formed in the portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion through the presser plate portion, the seventh bent straight line separating the sixth interval from the upper edge of the plate, and the said. The second, which is partitioned by each of the eighth bent straight lines and is hung on the surface side of the holding plate portion along the seventh bent straight line which is separated from the upper edge of the plate by the sixth interval. The first upper leg flat plate portion overlapped on the surface of the lower leg flat plate portion, and the seventh bent straight line and the ninth bent straight line each having the sixth interval separated from the reference bent straight line are defined. A first folding straight line that is erected on the surface side of the holding flat plate portion and overlapped with the surface of the lowered first lower leg flat plate portion along the 7th folding straight line that is separated from the reference bent straight line by the sixth interval. 2 The upper leg flat plate portion is partitioned by the 10th bent straight line, the 11th bent straight line, and the 13th bent straight line, and the presser plate portion is formed along the 10th bent straight line. It is divided into a pair of upper rising flat plates that are raised on the back surface side and overlapped with the surface of each of the lower raising flat plates that are raised, and the 8th bent straight line and the 11th bent straight line. Then, it is folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion along the respective 8th folding straight line, the 11th folding straight line and the 12th folding straight line, and the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion. Each of the lower side rising plate portions raised and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion folded and raised is arranged between the raised flat plate portions and the upper rising flat plate portions raised in. The pair of third shape-retaining flat plate portions to be overlapped with each other is partitioned by the 9th bent straight line and the 13th bent straight line, and the 9th bent straight line, the 13th bent straight line and the 13th bent straight line are formed. It is folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion along the 14th folding straight line, and is raised to the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and stands between the raised upper raising flat plate portion and the raised flat plate portion. The presser sheet is composed of each raised lower side rising flat plate portion and a pair of fourth holding flat plate portions on which the folded and raised first holding flat plate portions are arranged and stacked. The first presser sheet portion, which is loaded on the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is fixed to the lower flat plate by covering the loading window hole, and the pressing plate portion, which is loaded on the surface of the pressing plate portion and covers the pressing window hole. It is a packing cushioning material characterized by having a second pressing sheet portion fixed to an upper flat plate.

2. The loading reinforcing flat plate having a loading window hole portion is a plurality of loading reinforcing flat plate portions extending between the loading window hole edge and the loading window hole portion and partitioned by a plurality of loading cut lines. Each of the loading cut lines extends from the loading window hole edge and is opened in the loading window hole portion, and penetrates the loading reinforcing flat plate and opens on the front surface and the back surface of the loading reinforcing flat plate. The packing cushioning material according to claim 1, wherein the material is characterized by the above.

A third aspect of the present invention includes a presser foot reinforcing flat plate that is continuously provided to the presser plate portion along the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole, and the presser window hole is inside the presser window hole edge. The presser foot reinforcing flat plate having a presser window hole portion extends between the presser window hole edge and the presser window hole portion, and is a plurality of presser reinforcing flat plate portions partitioned by a plurality of presser cut lines. Each of the presser foot cut lines extends from the presser window hole edge and is opened in the presser window hole portion, and penetrates the presser reinforcing flat plate and opens on the front surface and the back surface of the presser reinforcing flat plate. The packing cushioning material according to claim 2, wherein the material is characterized by the above.

A fourth aspect of the present invention is a packing cushioning material having a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate side edges, and comprising a basic flat plate body having a predetermined plate thickness and a presser sheet. The basic flat plate is arranged in parallel with the upper edge of the plate at intervals of the upper plate, is arranged in parallel with the lower edge of the plate at intervals of the lower plate, and has a reference bending straight line intersecting the side edges of the respective plates. A pair of reference cut straight lines having a cut length from each plate side edge and being formed on the reference bent straight line and penetrating the base plate body and opening to the front surface and the back surface of the base plate body. The lower flat plate is partitioned by the reference bent straight line, the lower edge of the plate and the side edges of the plates, and the reference bent straight line, the upper edge of the plate and the side edges of the plates. Each plate side edge is composed of an upper plate and a pair of plate upper edges located between the plate upper edge and the reference bending straight line, and between the plate lower edge and the reference bending straight line. It has a pair of lower plate lower edges to be located, and the lower flat plate is arranged in parallel with the plate lower edge and the reference bending straight line with a first spacing, and is arranged in parallel with each other with a second spacing. A pair of first bent straight lines to be formed, and the first bent straight line and the reference notch which are arranged at the lower edge of each plate at a third interval and are separated from the reference bent straight line by the first interval. A pair of second bent straight lines orthogonal to a straight line, and the first bent straight line and the plate which are arranged at the lower edge of each plate at the third interval and are separated from the first interval at the lower edge of the plate . A pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge and the second bent straight line and each of the second bent straight lines arranged between the lower edge of each plate at a fourth interval and between the lower edge of each plate. A pair of fourth straight lines located parallel to each of the second folded straight lines and each of the third bent straight lines with a fifth interval, and orthogonal to each of the first bent straight lines. At each first intersection of the bent straight line and the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separated by the first interval from the reference bent straight line, the first sharp angle is formed on each of the fourth bent straight lines. A pair of fifth bent straight lines extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate, and the lower plate . At each second intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separated by the first interval at the edge , the first sharp angle is formed on each of the fourth bent straight lines, and the first of the above is formed. Each of the first bends has a reference bent straight line extending from two intersections and a pair of sixth bent straight lines extending toward the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edges of each plate. A loading flat plate portion partitioned by a straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines and a loading flat plate portion formed on the loading flat plate portion are formed on each other. A loading holding flat plate portion that penetrates the loading flat plate portion at a notch interval and is partitioned by a plurality of holding cutting lines that open on the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion, the reference bent straight line, and the reference. Along the first folding straight line that is partitioned by the first folding straight line that separates the first interval from the folding straight line and the second folding straight line that separates the first spacing from the reference folding straight line. It is divided into a first lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion, a first bent straight line that separates the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , and each third bent straight line. The second lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the first bent straight line that separates the first interval from the lower edge of the plate, and each of the fourth bent straight lines, said. A pair of lower rising flat plate portions that are partitioned by each 5th folded straight line and each 6th bent straight line and are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along each 4th bent straight line. It is divided by each of the second folded straight lines and each of the fifth bent straight lines, and is folded back along the respective second bent straight lines and the respective fifth bent straight lines to the back surface of each of the lower rising flat plate portions . It is divided by a pair of first shape-retaining flat plate portions raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion, each of the third bent straight lines and the sixth bent straight line, and each of the third bent straight lines. And a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions folded back to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion and raised to the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the sixth bent straight line. The upper plate is folded back to the surface of the lower plate along the reference bending straight line with the surface of the upper plate facing the surface of the lower plate, and the sixth plate upper edge and the reference bending straight line are formed. A pair of 7th bent straight lines arranged in parallel at intervals and parallel to each other at a 7th interval, and an 8th interval on the upper edge of each plate, the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of each plate. A pair of 8th folding straight lines located between the 2nd folding straight lines and orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line having the 6th interval between the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate, and each of the plates. It is arranged on the upper edge at the eighth interval, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the second bent straight lines, and is separated from the reference cut straight line and the reference bent straight line by the sixth interval. A pair of 9th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line, and the 8th folding straight line and the 8th folding straight line arranged between the upper edges of the respective plates at a 9th interval and between the upper edges of the respective plates. A pair of each of the 9th folding straight lines located parallel to the 8th folding straight line and each of the 9th folding straight lines with a tenth interval, and orthogonal to each of the 7th folding straight lines. The tenth bent straight line and the plate At each first base point on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the upper edge and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the upper edge of the plate, each tenth. A pair of eleventh bends extending from each first base point toward the reference bent straight line and the upper edge of each plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate, forming a second sharp angle on the bent straight line. It is located between the straight line and each of the eleventh bent straight lines and the upper edge of the plate, and is arranged in parallel with each of the eleventh bent straight lines with a thirteenth interval equal to or more than the plate thickness, and the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of the plate. It extends between a pair of 12th folding straight lines intersecting each of the 8th folding straight lines, the reference bending straight line, and the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval from the reference bending straight line. At each second base point on the extension of each tenth folding straight line, make the second sharp angle to each tenth folding straight line, and from each second base point to the upper edge of each plate and on the plate. Each of the thirteenth bends located between the pair of thirteenth bend straight lines extending toward the edge and intersecting the upper edge of each plate, the reference bend straight line and the thirteenth bend straight lines. It has a pair of 14th bent straight lines which are arranged in parallel with the 13th interval in a straight line and intersect the upper edge of each plate and each 9th bent straight line, and each of the 7th bent straight lines and the 7th bent straight line. A presser plate portion partitioned by each of the tenth bent straight lines, a presser foot window hole formed in the presser plate portion, penetrating the presser plate portion, and opening on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion. Along the 7th folding straight line separated by the 7th bending straight line separating the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate and the 8th folding straight line separating the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate. The first upper leg flat plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and is overlapped on the surface of the second lower leg flat plate portion that is erected, and the reference bent straight line are separated by the sixth interval. It is divided by the 7th folding straight line and each of the 9th folding straight lines, and is lowered to the surface side of the holding flat plate portion along the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval from the reference bending straight line. The second upper leg flat plate portion overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion which was raised and lowered, and the tenth bent straight line, the eleventh bent straight line, and the thirteenth bent straight line. A pair of upper rising flat plate portions that are partitioned by and and are raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion along the tenth bending straight line and overlapped with the surface of each raised lower raising flat plate portion. And each of the 8th folding straight lines, the 11th folding straight lines, and the 12th folding straight lines. Upper side Each lower rising flat plate portion folded back on the surface of the rising flat plate portion and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised upper raising flat plate portions and the raised flat plate portions . , The pair of the third shape-retaining flat plate portions that are overlapped by arranging the second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are folded and raised, and the ninth folding straight line and the thirteenth folding straight line. Then, it is folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion along the 9th folding straight line, the 13th folding straight line, and the 14th folding straight line, and stands on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion. The raised lower side rising flat plate portions and the folded and raised first first shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and stacked between the raised and raised upper rising flat plate portions. It is composed of a pair of fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions, and the presser sheet is loaded on the surface of the loading flat plate portion, covers the sanctioned holding flat plate portion, and is fixed to the lower plate portion. It is a packing cushioning material having a second presser sheet portion which is loaded on the surface of the presser plate portion and is fixed to the upper flat plate so as to cover the presser window hole.

Claim 5 according to the present invention has a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate upper edges, and has an upper plate having a predetermined plate thickness, a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate lower side edges. It is a packing cushioning material provided with a lower plate having the thickness of the plate and a pressing sheet, and the lower plate is arranged in parallel with the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate with a first interval. A pair of first bent straight lines arranged in parallel with each other separated by a second interval, and the first arranged on the lower edge of each plate with a third interval and separated by the first interval on the upper edge of the plate. The first bent straight line, a pair of second bent straight lines orthogonal to the upper edge of the plate, and the lower edge of each plate separated by the third interval, and the lower edge of the plate separated by the first interval. The first bent straight line and a pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge of the plate are arranged at the lower edge of each plate at a distance of a fourth interval, and are located between the lower edge of each plate. The second folding straight line and each of the third folding straight lines are located and arranged in parallel with each of the second folding straight lines and each of the third folding straight lines at a fifth interval, and each of the first folding straight lines. At each first intersection of the pair of fourth bent straight lines orthogonal to the straight line, the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the upper edge of the plate, and each of the fourth bent straight lines, the fourth each. A pair of fifth folds extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate at a first sharp angle on the bent straight line. At each second intersection of the curved straight line, the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , and each of the fourth bent straight lines, the first sharp angle with respect to each of the fourth bent straight lines. A pair of sixth bent straight lines extending from each of the second intersections toward the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edges of each plate. A loading flat plate portion partitioned by each of the first bent straight lines and each of the fourth bent straight lines, and the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion formed on the loading flat plate portion and penetrating the loading flat plate portion. It is partitioned by a loading window hole opened in the plate, the upper edge of the plate, the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the upper edge of the plate, and the second bent straight line, and the upper edge of the plate is defined by the first bent straight line. The first lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the first bending straight line that separates the first interval, and the first bending that separates the first interval from the lower edge of the plate . A second lower leg that is partitioned by a straight line and each of the third bent straight lines and is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the first bent straight line that separates the first interval from the lower edge of the plate . The flat plate portion is divided into the 4th folding straight line, the 5th folding straight line, and the 6th folding straight line, and the 4th folding straight line is divided. It is divided by a pair of lower rising flat plate portions that are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion, and each of the second bent straight lines and each of the fifth bent straight lines, and each of the second bent straight lines. A pair of first shape-retaining flat plate portions folded back to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion and raised to the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion along a straight line and each of the fifth bent straight lines, and each of the first It is divided by a 3-fold straight line and each of the 6-fold straight lines, and is folded back along the 3-fold straight line and each of the 6-fold straight lines to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. It is composed of a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion, and the upper flat plate is formed on the surface of the lower flat plate with the surface of the upper flat plate facing the surface of the lower flat plate. A pair of seventh bent straight lines that are loaded and arranged in parallel with the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate with a sixth interval and parallel with each other with a seventh interval, and on the upper edge of each plate. The 7th bent straight line is arranged at an 8th interval and is located between the upper edge of each plate and the 2nd bent straight line, and is separated from the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate by the 6th interval. A pair of eighth bent straight lines orthogonal to each other and the upper edge of each plate are arranged at the eighth interval, and are located between the upper edge of each plate and the second bent straight line of the plate. A pair of 9th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the edge and the lower edge of the plate, and the upper side of each plate that is arranged at the upper edge of each plate with a 9th interval. The 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located between the edges and the 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line, and are arranged in parallel with a tenth interval. And a pair of tenth bending straight lines orthogonal to each of the seventh folding straight lines, and the seventh folding straight line extending at the plate upper edge and the seventh bending straight line separating the sixth interval from the plate upper edge. At each first base point on the extension of each tenth folding straight line, a second sharp angle is formed with each tenth folding straight line, and the lower edge of the plate and the upper edge of each plate are formed from the first base point. A pair of eleventh bent straight lines extending toward the upper edge of each plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate, and the eleventh bent straight line located between the eleventh bent straight line and the upper edge of the plate. A pair of twelfth bent straight lines that are arranged in parallel with a thirteenth interval equal to or larger than the plate thickness and intersect the upper edge of each plate and the eighth folded straight line, the lower edge of the plate, and the lower edge of the plate. At each second base point on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the seventh folding straight line and the seventh folding straight line separated by the sixth interval, the second sharp angle to the tenth folding straight line. From each of the second base points to the upper edge of each plate and the front Each thirteenth is located between a pair of thirteenth bent straight lines extending toward the upper edge of the board and intersecting the upper edge of each board, and the lower edge of the board and each thirteenth folding straight line. Each of the 7th folds has a pair of 14th folds that are arranged parallel to the fold straight line with the 13th interval apart and intersect the upper edge of each plate and the 9th folds. A presser plate portion formed by a straight line and each of the tenth bent straight lines, and a presser foot hole formed in the presser plate portion and penetrated through the presser plate portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion. And the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate, and the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate. A first upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and overlapped with the surface of the second lower leg flat plate portion that has been erected, and the sixth interval on the lower edge of the plate. It is divided by the 7th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line that are separated from each other, and is erected on the surface side of the holding flat plate portion along the 7th folding straight line that is separated by the 6th interval at the lower edge of the plate. The second upper leg flat plate portion overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion which was raised and lowered, and the tenth bent straight line, the eleventh bent straight line, and the thirteenth bent straight line. A pair of upper rising flat plate portions that are partitioned by and and are raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion along the tenth bending straight line and overlapped with the surface of each raised lower raising flat plate portion. And each of the 8th folding straight lines, the 11th folding straight lines, and the 12th folding straight lines. The lower rising flat plates folded back on the surface of the upper rising flat plate portion and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised upper raising flat plate portions. A pair of third shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the second shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and overlapped, and the ninth folding straight line and the thirteenth folding straight line are formed. It is partitioned and folded back along the 9th folding straight line, the 13th folding straight line and the 14th folding straight line to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion and to the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion. Each of the raised lower side raised plate portions and the folded and raised first shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and overlapped with each of the raised and raised upper raised flat plate portions. The presser sheet is composed of a pair of fourth shape-retaining flat plates, and the presser sheet is loaded on the surface of the loading plate and covers the loading window hole and is fixed to the lower plate. It is a packing cushioning material having a second presser sheet portion which is loaded on the surface of the presser plate portion and is fixed to the upper flat plate so as to cover the presser window hole.

A sixth aspect of the present invention comprises a loading reinforcing flat plate that is connected to the loading flat plate portion along the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole, and the loading window hole is inside the loading window hole edge. The loading reinforcing flat plate having a loading window hole portion is a plurality of loading reinforcing flat plate portions extending between the loading window hole edge and the loading window hole portion and partitioned by a plurality of loading cut lines. Each of the loading cut lines extends from the loading window hole edge and is opened in the loading window hole portion, and penetrates the loading reinforcing flat plate and opens on the front surface and the back surface of the loading reinforcing flat plate. The packing cushioning material according to claim 5, wherein the material is characterized by the above.

A seventh aspect of the present invention includes a presser foot reinforcing flat plate that is continuously provided to the presser plate portion along the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole, and the presser window hole is inside the presser window hole edge. The presser foot reinforcing flat plate having a presser window hole portion extends between the presser window hole edge and the presser window hole portion, and is a plurality of presser reinforcing flat plate portions partitioned by a plurality of presser cut lines. Each of the presser foot cut lines extends from the presser window hole edge and is opened in the presser window hole portion, and penetrates the presser reinforcing flat plate and opens on the front surface and the back surface of the presser reinforcing flat plate. The packing cushioning material according to claim 6, wherein the material is characterized by the above.

Claim 8 according to the present invention has a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate upper edges, and has an upper plate having a predetermined plate thickness, a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate lower side edges. It is a packing cushioning material provided with a lower plate having the thickness of the plate and a pressing sheet, and the lower plate is arranged in parallel with the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate with a first interval. A pair of first bent straight lines arranged in parallel with each other separated by a second interval, and the first arranged on the lower edge of each plate with a third interval and separated by the first interval on the upper edge of the plate. The first bent straight line, a pair of second bent straight lines orthogonal to the upper edge of the plate, and the lower edge of each plate separated by the third interval, and the lower edge of the plate separated by the first interval. The first bent straight line and a pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge of the plate are arranged at the lower edge of each plate at a distance of a fourth interval, and are located between the lower edge of each plate. The second folding straight line and each of the third folding straight lines are located and arranged in parallel with each of the second folding straight lines and each of the third folding straight lines at a fifth interval, and each of the first folding straight lines. At each first intersection of the pair of fourth bent straight lines orthogonal to the straight line, the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the upper edge of the plate, and each of the fourth bent straight lines, the fourth each. A pair of fifth folds extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate at a first sharp angle on the bent straight line. At each second intersection of the curved straight line, the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , and each of the fourth bent straight lines, the first sharp angle with respect to each of the fourth bent straight lines. A pair of sixth bent straight lines extending from each of the second intersections toward the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate and intersecting the lower edges of the plate. The loading flat plate portion partitioned by each of the first bent straight lines and the fourth bent straight line, and the loading flat plate portion formed on the loading flat plate portion, penetrating the loading flat plate portion with a notch interval from each other. A plurality of loading holding flat plate portions partitioned by a plurality of holding cutting lines opening on the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion, and the first bending that separates the first space between the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate. A first lower leg that is partitioned by a straight line and each of the second bent straight lines and is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the first bent straight line that separates the first interval from the upper edge of the plate. The first folding line is partitioned by a flat plate portion, the first bending straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , and the third folding straight line, and the first interval is separated from the lower edge of the plate . A second lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along a straight line, each of the fourth bent straight lines, and each of the fifth folds. A pair of lower rising flat plate portions, which are divided by a curved straight line and each of the 6th bent straight lines and are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the 4th bent straight line, and each of the second It is divided by a folding straight line and each of the 5th folding straight lines, and is folded back along the 2nd folding straight line and each of the 5th folding straight lines to the back surface of each of the lower rising flat plate portions and loaded. It is partitioned by a pair of first shape-retaining flat plate portions raised on the surface side of the flat plate portion, the third bent straight line and the sixth bent straight line, and the third bent straight line and the first one. The upper flat plate is composed of a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are folded back to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion and raised on the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion along a 6-fold straight line. , The surface of the upper plate is directed toward the surface of the lower plate, and the surface of the lower plate is loaded. A pair of 7th bent straight lines arranged in parallel with each other and an 8th interval between the upper edge of each plate and located between the upper edge of each plate and the 2nd bent straight line. A pair of 8th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate, and the 8th interval is arranged on the upper edge of each plate. A pair of 9th bends located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the 2nd bend straight lines and orthogonal to the 7th bend straight line separating the 6th interval between the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate. The straight line and the upper edge of each plate are arranged at a ninth interval, and the eighth bent straight line and the ninth bent straight line are located between the straight line and the upper edge of each plate. A pair of tenth folding straight lines arranged in parallel with the folding straight line and each of the ninth folding straight lines at a tenth interval and orthogonal to each of the seventh folding straight lines, the upper edge of the plate, and the plate. At each first base point on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the seventh folding straight line and the seventh folding straight line on the upper edge, the second to the tenth folding straight line. A pair of eleventh bent straight lines extending from each first base point toward the lower edge of the plate and the upper edge of each plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate at a sharp angle, and each eleventh. It is located between the bent straight line and the upper edge of the plate, and is arranged in parallel with each of the 11th bent straight lines at a distance of 13th than the thickness of the plate. Of the 10th folding straight line extending between the pair of 12th folding straight lines intersecting with the lower edge of the plate and the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval from the lower edge of the plate. At each second base point on the extension line, before each tenth folding straight line A pair of thirteen curved straight lines extending from each of the second base points toward the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of the plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate at the second sharp angle, and the said. It is located between the lower edge of the plate and each of the thirteenth folding straight lines, and is arranged in parallel with each of the thirteenth folding straight lines at the thirteenth interval. A presser plate portion having a pair of intersecting 14th bent straight lines and partitioned by the 7th bent straight line and the 10th bent straight line, and the presser plate portion formed on the presser plate portion. A presser window hole that penetrates the flat plate portion and is opened on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion, the 7th bent straight line that separates the 6th interval on the upper edge of the plate, and each of the 8th bent straight lines. The surface of the second lower leg flat plate portion, which is partitioned by the above plate and is hung on the surface side of the holding plate portion along the seventh bending straight line separating the sixth interval from the plate upper edge. The first upper leg flat plate portion to be overlapped with the plate, the seventh bent straight line separating the sixth interval from the lower edge of the plate, and the ninth bent straight line to each of the ninth bent straight lines, and the sixth interval to the lower edge of the plate. A second upper leg flat plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion along the seventh bent straight line and is overlapped on the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion that is erected, and each of the above. It is divided into a tenth folding straight line, each of the eleventh folding straight lines, and each of the thirteenth folding straight lines, and is raised along the tenth folding straight line on the back surface side of the holding plate portion. It is divided by a pair of upper rising flat plate portions stacked on the surface of each lower rising flat plate portion, the 8th folding straight line and the 11th folding straight line, and each of the 8th folding straight lines. , Folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion along the 11th folded straight line and each 12th bent straight line, and raised and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion. A pair of third-retaining plates that are stacked by arranging and stacking each of the lower-retaining flat plate portions that are raised between the upper rising flat plate portions and the second-reserving flat plate portions that are folded and raised. The flat plate portion is divided into the 9th folding straight line and the 13th folding straight line, and along the 9th folding straight line, the 13th folding straight line, and the 14th folding straight line. Each lower rising flat plate portion folded back on the surface of each upper rising flat plate portion and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised upper rising flat plate portions. The presser sheet is loaded on the surface of the loading flat plate portion, which is composed of a pair of fourth retaining flat plate portions on which the folded and raised first retaining flat plate portions are arranged and stacked. , The first presser sheet portion that covers each of the loading and holding flat plate portions and is fixed to the lower flat plate, and the second presser that is loaded on the surface of the presser plate portion and covers the presser window hole and is fixed to the upper flat plate. It is a packing cushioning material characterized by having a sheet portion and a sheet portion.

In claim 1 according to the present invention, first, in the developed packing cushioning material, an article (commodity / product) is loaded on the first sheet portion (the surface of the first presser sheet portion) inside the loading window hole. do. The article is loaded on the surface of the first pressing sheet portion located inside the loading window hole. Secondly, in a state where the article is loaded on the first presser sheet portion, the upper flat plate is folded back to the surface of the lower flat plate along the reference bending straight line. The upper plate is folded back to the surface of the lower plate along a reference bending straight line with the surface of the upper plate facing the surface of the lower plate. At this time, the holding flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the pressing flat plate portion faces the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the loading flat plate portion, and the first upper leg flat plate portion is the surface of the first upper leg flat plate portion. Is placed on the surface of the first lower leg plate portion so as to face the surface of the second lower leg plate portion. The second upper leg flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the second upper leg flat plate portion faces the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion. The portions are arranged so as to overlap the surface of each lower leg flat plate portion with the surface of each upper rising flat plate portion facing the surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. Each third shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each third shape-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion. The shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion and overlaps the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. In the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is in contact with the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. The article is brought into contact with the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. As a result, the presser sheet is arranged between the first presser sheet portion located inside the loading window hole and the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. Third, the first lower leg plate and the second upper leg plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other have a first bending straight line that separates the first interval from the reference bending straight line, and a sixth interval between the reference bending straight lines. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the 7th bending straight line that separates them, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. The second lower leg flat plate portion and the first upper leg flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate of the foundation plate, and the sixth plate upper edge of the foundation plate. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the seventh bending straight line separating the intervals, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. At this time, in the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is pressed against the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. As a result, the presser sheet holds the article between the first presser sheet portion and the first presser sheet portion, and fixes the article. Fourth, each lower rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion arranged in an overlapping manner are formed on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along each 4th folding straight line and each 10th folding straight line. It is bent to the back surface side of the flat plate portion and is raised to the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the presser sheet portion. At this time, each upper rising flat plate portion is arranged between each raised lower flat plate portion, and is in contact with the surface of each lower raising flat plate portion and is arranged so as to be overlapped with each other. Fifth, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion and each fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are each second bent straight line, each fifth bent straight line, each ninth bent straight line, and each thirteenth folded straight line. Along the curved straight line and each 14th folding straight line, it is folded back to the back surface side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion, and to the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised and is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions is between the raised upper side flat plate portion and each of the raised lower side rising flat plate portions, and each of the raised and folded 1st shape-retaining flat plate portions. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. Seventh, each of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions and each third shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to be overlapped with each third bent straight line, each sixth bent straight line, each eighth bent straight line, and each eleventh. Along the folded straight line and each 12th bent straight line, it is folded back to the back side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper raised flat plate portion, and is folded back to the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each third holding flat plate portion is between each raised upper flat plate portion and each raised lower raising flat plate portion, and each raised and folded second holding flat plate portion. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion.
In this way, in the packing cushioning material of claim 1, when packing the article (commodity / product), the article is loaded on the first presser sheet portion, and the upper flat plate is folded back on the surface of the lower flat plate, respectively. Lower leg flat plate portion and each "upper leg flat plate portion are lowered, each lower side rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion are raised, and each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion is folded back and raised. By raising the article, the article can be sandwiched between the first and second presser sheet portions, and the article can be fixed by the first and second presser sheet portions.
As a result, when packing the article, the article can be packed by bending the upper plate and the lower flat plate along the first to thirteen bending straight lines, and the packing work of the article becomes easy and easy.
According to the first aspect of the present invention, the first and second lower leg flat plates are lowered, the first and second upper leg flat plates are lowered, and the first and second presser sheets are sandwiched. Support the goods that have been made.
As a result, the packing cushioning material for packing the goods (commodities) is stored in the packing box from the raised first and second lower leg flat plates and the raised first and second upper leg flat plates. Therefore, due to the weight of the article, the article does not come into contact with the bottom of the packing box, and the cushioning function is excellent.

In claim 2 according to the present invention, in the loading reinforcing flat plate, each loading reinforcing flat plate portion bends the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole in a straight line as the first and second lower leg flat plates are lowered. As a result, it is bent so as to protrude from the back surface of the loading flat plate portion. As a result, the articles loaded on the first pressing sheet portion can be held by each loading reinforcing flat plate portion.

In claim 3 according to the present invention, in the presser foot reinforcing flat plate, each presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion uses the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole as a bent straight line as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions are lowered. , It is bent so as to protrude from the surface of the presser plate portion.
As a result, the article can be sandwiched and held by each load reinforcing flat plate portion and each presser reinforcing flat plate portion.

In claim 4, according to the present invention, first, in the developed packing cushioning material, an article (commodity / product) is placed on the first presser sheet portion (on the surface of the first presser sheet portion) and each loading holding flat plate. Load on the department. The article is loaded on the surface of the first pressing sheet portion on the loading holding flat plate portion. Secondly, the upper flat plate is folded back to the surface of the lower flat plate along the reference bending straight line in a state where the article is loaded on the first pressing sheet portion and each loading holding flat plate portion. The upper plate is folded back to the surface of the lower plate along a reference bending straight line with the surface of the upper plate facing the surface of the lower plate. At this time, the pressing flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the pressing flat plate portion faces the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the loading flat plate portion, and the first upper leg flat plate portion is the surface of the first upper leg flat plate portion. Is placed on the surface of the first lower leg plate portion so as to face the surface of the second lower leg plate portion. The second upper leg flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the second upper leg flat plate portion faces the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion. The portions are arranged so as to overlap the surface of each lower leg flat plate portion with the surface of each upper rising flat plate portion facing the surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. Each third shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each third shape-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion. The shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each fourth-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion and overlaps the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. In the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is in contact with the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. The article is brought into contact with the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. As a result, the presser sheet is arranged between the first presser sheet portion located inside the loading window hole and the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. Third, the first lower leg plate and the second upper leg plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other have a first bending straight line that separates the first interval from the reference bending straight line, and a sixth interval between the reference bending straight lines. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the 7th bending straight line that separates them, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. The second lower leg flat plate portion and the first upper leg flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate of the foundation plate, and the sixth plate upper edge of the foundation plate. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the seventh bending straight line separating the intervals, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. At this time, in the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is pressed against the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. As a result, the presser sheet holds the article between the first presser sheet portion and the first presser sheet portion, and fixes the article. Each load holding flat plate portion holds an article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. Fourth, each lower rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion arranged in an overlapping manner are formed on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along each 4th folding straight line and each 10th folding straight line. It is bent to the back surface side of the flat plate portion and is raised to the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the presser sheet portion. At this time, each upper rising flat plate portion is arranged between each raised lower flat plate portion, and is in contact with the surface of each lower raising flat plate portion and is arranged so as to be overlapped with each other. Fifth, the 1st shape-retaining flat plate portion and each 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are each 2nd bent straight line, each 5th bent straight line, each 9th bent straight line, and each 13th folded straight line. Along the curved straight line and each 14th folding straight line, it is folded back to the back surface side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion, and to the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised and is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions is between the raised upper side flat plate portion and each of the raised lower side rising flat plate portions, and each of the raised and folded 1st shape-retaining flat plate portions. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. Seventh, each of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions and each third shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to be overlapped with each third bent straight line, each sixth bent straight line, each eighth bent straight line, and each eleventh. Along the folded straight line and each 12th bent straight line, it is folded back to the back side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper raised flat plate portion, and is folded back to the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each third holding flat plate portion is between each raised upper flat plate portion and each raised lower raising flat plate portion, and each raised and folded second holding flat plate portion. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion.
In this way, in the packing cushioning material of claim 1, when packing the article (commodity / product), the article is loaded on the first presser sheet portion, and the upper flat plate is folded back on the surface of the lower flat plate, respectively. Lower leg flat plate portion and each "upper leg flat plate portion are lowered, each lower side rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion are raised, and each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion is folded back and raised. By raising the article, the article can be sandwiched between the first and second presser sheet portions, and the article can be fixed by the first and second presser sheet portions. Each load holding flat plate portion holds an article by sandwiching the article with the second pressing sheet portion to hold the article.
As a result, when packing the article, the article can be packed by bending the upper plate and the lower flat plate along the first to thirteen bending straight lines, and the packing work of the article becomes easy and easy.
According to claim 4, according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the first and second lower leg flat plates are lowered, the first and second upper leg flat plates are lowered, and the first and second presser sheets are sandwiched. Support the goods that have been made.
As a result, the packing cushioning material for packing the goods (commodities) is stored in the packing box from the raised first and second lower leg flat plates and the raised first and second upper leg flat plates. Therefore, due to the weight of the article, the article does not come into contact with the bottom of the packing box, and the cushioning function is excellent.

In claim 5, according to claim 5, first, in the developed packing cushioning material, an article (commodity / product) is loaded on the first sheet portion (the surface of the first presser sheet portion) inside the loading window hole. do. The article is loaded on the surface of the first pressing sheet portion located inside the loading window hole. Second, the upper flat plate is loaded (laminated) on the surface of the lower flat plate in a state where the article is loaded on the first presser sheet portion. The upper plate is loaded on the surface of the lower plate with the surface of the upper plate facing the surface of the lower plate. At this time, the pressing flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the pressing flat plate portion faces the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the loading flat plate portion, and the first upper leg flat plate portion is the surface of the first upper leg flat plate portion. Is placed on the surface of the first lower leg plate portion so as to face the surface of the second lower leg plate portion. The second upper leg flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the second upper leg flat plate portion faces the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion. The portions are arranged so as to overlap the surface of each lower leg flat plate portion with the surface of each upper rising flat plate portion facing the surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. Each third shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each third shape-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion. The shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion and overlaps the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. In the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is in contact with the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. The article is brought into contact with the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. As a result, the presser sheet is arranged between the first presser sheet portion located inside the loading window hole and the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. Third, the first lower leg plate and the second upper leg plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other have a first bending straight line that separates the first interval from the reference bending straight line, and a sixth interval between the reference bending straight lines. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the 7th bending straight line that separates them, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. The second lower leg flat plate portion and the first upper leg flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate of the foundation plate, and the sixth plate upper edge of the foundation plate. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the seventh bending straight line separating the intervals, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. At this time, in the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is pressed against the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. As a result, the presser sheet holds the article between the first presser sheet portion and the first presser sheet portion, and fixes the article. Fourth, each lower rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion arranged in an overlapping manner are formed on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along each 4th folding straight line and each 10th folding straight line. It is bent to the back surface side of the flat plate portion and is raised to the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the presser sheet portion. At this time, each upper rising flat plate portion is arranged between each raised lower flat plate portion, and is in contact with the surface of each lower raising flat plate portion and is arranged so as to be overlapped with each other. Fifth, the 1st shape-retaining flat plate portion and each 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are each 2nd bent straight line, each 5th bent straight line, each 9th bent straight line, and each 13th folded straight line. Along the curved straight line and each 14th folding straight line, it is folded back to the back surface side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion, and to the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised and is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions is between the raised upper side flat plate portion and each of the raised lower side rising flat plate portions, and each of the raised and folded 1st shape-retaining flat plate portions. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. Seventh, each of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions and each third shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to be overlapped with each third bent straight line, each sixth bent straight line, each eighth bent straight line, and each eleventh. Along the folded straight line and each 12th bent straight line, it is folded back to the back side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper raised flat plate portion, and is folded back to the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each third holding flat plate portion is between each raised upper flat plate portion and each raised lower raising flat plate portion, and each raised and folded second holding flat plate portion. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion.
In this way, in the packing cushioning material of claim 1, when packing the article (commodity / product), the article is loaded on the first presser sheet portion, and the upper flat plate is loaded on the surface of the lower flat plate. Each lower leg flat plate portion and each "upper leg flat plate portion" are raised, each lower rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion are raised, and each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion is folded back. By standing up, the article can be sandwiched between the first and second presser sheet portions, and the article can be fixed by the first and second presser sheet portions.
As a result, when packing the article, the article can be packed by bending the upper plate and the lower flat plate along the first to thirteen bending straight lines, and the packing work of the article becomes easy and easy.
According to claim 5, according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the first and second lower leg flat plates are lowered, the first and second upper leg flat plates are lowered, and the first and second presser sheets are sandwiched. Support the goods that have been made.
As a result, the packing cushioning material for packing the goods (commodities) is stored in the packing box from the raised first and second lower leg flat plates and the raised first and second upper leg flat plates. Therefore, due to the weight of the article, the article does not come into contact with the bottom of the packing box, and the cushioning function is excellent.

In claim 6 according to the present invention, in the loading reinforcing flat plate, each loading reinforcing flat plate portion bends the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole in a straight line as the first and second lower leg flat plates are lowered. As a result, it is bent so as to protrude from the back surface of the loading flat plate portion. As a result, the articles loaded on the first pressing sheet portion can be held by each loading reinforcing flat plate portion.

According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, in the presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion, each presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion uses the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole as a bent straight line as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions are lowered. , It is bent so as to protrude from the surface of the presser plate portion.
As a result, the article can be sandwiched and held by each load reinforcing flat plate portion and each presser reinforcing flat plate portion.

In claim 8 according to the present invention, first, in the developed packing cushioning material, an article (commodity / product) is placed on the first presser sheet portion (on the surface of the first presser sheet portion) and each loading holding flat plate. Load on the department. The article is loaded on the surface of the first pressing sheet portion on each loading holding flat plate portion. Secondly, the upper flat plate is loaded (laminated) on the surface of the lower flat plate in a state where the article is loaded on the first presser sheet portion and each loading holding flat plate portion. The upper plate is loaded on the surface of the lower plate along a reference bending straight line with the surface of the upper plate facing the surface of the lower plate. At this time, the holding flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the pressing flat plate portion faces the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the loading flat plate portion, and the first upper leg flat plate portion is the surface of the first upper leg flat plate portion. Is placed on the surface of the first lower leg plate portion so as to face the surface of the second lower leg plate portion. The second upper leg flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of the second upper leg flat plate portion faces the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion. The portions are arranged so as to overlap the surface of each lower leg flat plate portion with the surface of each upper rising flat plate portion facing the surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. Each third shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each third shape-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion and is overlapped with the surface of each second shape-retaining flat plate portion. The shape-retaining flat plate portion is arranged so that the surface of each fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion faces the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion and overlaps the surface of each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. In the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is in contact with the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. The article is brought into contact with the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. As a result, the presser sheet is arranged between the first presser sheet portion located inside the loading window hole and the second presser sheet portion located inside the presser window hole. Third, the first lower leg plate and the second upper leg plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other have a first bending straight line that separates the first interval from the reference bending straight line, and a sixth interval between the reference bending straight lines. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the 7th bending straight line that separates them, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. The second lower leg flat plate portion and the first upper leg flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate of the foundation plate, and the sixth plate upper edge of the foundation plate. It is bent toward the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the front surface side of the pressing flat plate portion along the seventh bending straight line separating the intervals, and is hung down on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the pressing flat plate portion. At this time, in the presser sheet, the second presser sheet portion is pressed against the article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. As a result, the presser sheet holds the article between the first presser sheet portion and the first presser sheet portion, and fixes the article. Each load holding flat plate portion holds an article loaded on the first presser sheet portion. Fourth, each lower rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion arranged in an overlapping manner are formed on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along each 4th folding straight line and each 10th folding straight line. It is bent to the back surface side of the flat plate portion and is raised to the front surface side of the loading flat plate portion and the back surface side of the presser sheet portion. At this time, each upper rising flat plate portion is arranged between each raised lower flat plate portion, and is in contact with the surface of each lower raising flat plate portion and is arranged so as to be overlapped with each other. Fifth, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion and each fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to overlap each other are each second bent straight line, each fifth bent straight line, each ninth bent straight line, and each thirteenth folded straight line. Along the curved straight line and each 14th folding straight line, it is folded back to the back surface side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion, and to the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised and is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions is between the raised upper side flat plate portion and each of the raised lower side rising flat plate portions, and each of the raised and folded 1st shape-retaining flat plate portions. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion. Seventh, each of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions and each third shape-retaining flat plate portion arranged so as to be overlapped with each third bent straight line, each sixth bent straight line, each eighth bent straight line, and each eleventh. Along the bent straight line and each 12th folding straight line, it is folded back to the back surface side of each raised flat plate portion, folded back to the front surface of each upper rising flat plate portion, and the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion. It is raised on the back side of the presser plate. At this time, each third holding flat plate portion is between each raised upper flat plate portion and each raised lower raising flat plate portion, and each raised and folded second holding flat plate portion. The flat plate portion is arranged so as to be overlapped with each lower rising flat plate portion and each first shape-retaining flat plate portion.
In this way, in the packing cushioning material of claim 1, when packing the article (commodity / product), the article is loaded on the first presser sheet portion, the upper plate is folded back on the surface of the lower plate, and each is Lower leg flat plate portion and each "upper leg flat plate portion are lowered, each lower side rising flat plate portion and each upper rising flat plate portion are raised, and each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion is folded back and raised. By raising the article, the article can be sandwiched between the first and second presser sheet portions, and the article can be fixed by the first and second presser sheet portions. Each load holding flat plate portion holds an article by sandwiching the article with the second pressing sheet portion to hold the article.
As a result, when packing the article, the article can be packed by bending the upper plate and the lower flat plate along the first to thirteen bending straight lines, and the packing work of the article becomes easy and easy.
According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the first and second lower leg flat plates are lowered, the first and second upper leg flat plates are lowered, and the first and second presser sheets are sandwiched. Support the goods that have been made.
As a result, the packing cushioning material for packing the goods (commodities) is stored in the packing box from the raised first and second lower leg flat plates and the raised first and second upper leg flat plates. Therefore, due to the weight of the article, the article does not come into contact with the bottom of the packing box, and the cushioning function is excellent.

It is a front plan view (developed table plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 1st Embodiment. It is a back plan view (developed back plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 1st Embodiment. It is a plan perspective view (developed table perspective view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. FIG. 1 is a front plan view showing the upper half of the lower flat plate constituting the packing cushioning material. FIG. 1 is a front plan view showing the lower half of the lower flat plate constituting the packing cushioning material. FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 7, and is a front plan view showing the relationship between the fourth bent straight line on the right side and the fifth bent straight line on the right side. FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 7, and is a front plan view showing the relationship between the fourth bent straight line on the left side and the fifth folded straight line on the left side. It is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 8, and is the front plan view which shows the relationship between the 4th folding straight line on the right side and the 6th folding straight line on the right side. It is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 8, and is the front plan view which shows the relationship between the 4th folding straight line on the left side and the 6th folding straight line on the left side. It is a front plan view which shows the plate upper edge, the plate lower edge, the right side plate lower side edge, and the left side plate lower side edge of the lower plate. In the enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 13, the lower edge portion of the first plate on the right side, the lower edge portion of the third plate on the right side, the lower edge portion of the fifth plate on the right side, and the lower edge portion of the seventh plate on the right side. It is a front plan view which shows. In the enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 13, the lower edge portion of the first plate on the left side, the upper edge portion of the third plate on the left side, the lower edge portion of the fifth plate on the left side, and the lower edge portion of the seventh plate on the left side are shown. It is a front plan view which shows. In the enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 13, the lower edge of the second plate on the right side, the lower edge of the fourth plate on the right side, the lower edge of the sixth plate on the right side, and the lower edge of the seventh plate on the right side. It is a front plan view which shows a part. In the enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 13, the lower edge of the second plate on the left side, the lower edge of the fourth plate on the left side, the lower edge of the sixth plate on the left side, and the lower edge of the seventh plate on the left side. It is a front plan view which shows a part. FIG. 1 is a front plan view showing the upper half of the upper flat plate constituting the packing cushioning material. FIG. 1 is a front plan view showing the lower half of the upper flat plate constituting the packing cushioning material. FIG. 18 is an enlarged view of a main part, and is a front plan view showing the relationship between the 10th folding straight line on the right side, the 11th folding straight line on the right side, and the 12th folding straight line on the right side. FIG. 18 is an enlarged view of a main part, and is a front plan view showing the relationship between the 10th folding straight line on the left side, the 11th folding straight line on the left side, and the 12th folding straight line on the left side. FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 19, and is a front plan view showing the relationship between the 10th folding straight line on the right side, the 13th folding straight line on the right side, and the 14th folding straight line on the right side. FIG. 19 is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 19, and is a front plan view showing the relationship between the 10th folding straight line on the left side, the 13th folding straight line on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line on the left side. It is a front plan view which shows the upper plate edge, the plate lower edge, the right side plate upper edge, and the left side plate upper edge. An enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 24, showing a table showing an upper edge portion of the first plate on the right side, an upper edge portion of the third plate on the right side, an upper edge portion of the fifth plate on the right side, and an upper edge portion of the seventh plate on the right side. It is a plan view. An enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 24, showing a table showing an upper edge portion of the first plate on the left side, an upper edge portion of the third plate on the left side, an upper edge portion of the fifth plate on the left side, and an upper edge portion of the seventh plate on the left side. It is a plan view. An enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 24, showing a table showing the upper edge of the second plate on the right side, the upper edge of the fourth plate on the right side, the upper edge of the sixth plate on the right side, and the upper edge of the seventh plate on the right side. It is a plan view. An enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 24, showing a table showing an upper edge portion of the second plate on the left side, an upper edge portion of the fourth plate on the left side, an upper edge portion of the sixth plate on the left side, and an upper edge portion of the seventh plate on the left side. It is a plan view. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 1st Embodiment, and is the front plan perspective view which loaded the article (commodity) on the packing cushioning material (the first presser sheet part) in the expanded state. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 1st Embodiment, and is the plan perspective view which the upper flat plate is folded back to the surface of the lower flat plate along the reference bending straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 1st Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a perspective view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 1st Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a plan view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. FIG. 32 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 1st Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a perspective view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 1st Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a top view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF of FIG. 36. It is a perspective view which shows the cushioning material for packing which was assembled and packed, and the packing box in the cushioning material for packing of 1st Embodiment. In the packing cushioning material of the first embodiment, it is a top view in which the packing cushioning material assembled and packed is stored inside the packing box. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 39. FIG. 36 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along the line FF. It is a front plan view (developed table plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a back plan view (developed back plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a plan perspective view (developed table perspective view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II of FIG. 43. FIG. 4 is a sectional view taken along the line JJ of FIG. 43. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 2nd Embodiment, and is the front plane perspective which loaded the article (commodity) on the packing cushioning material (the first presser sheet part and the loading reinforcement flat plate) in an unfolded state. It is a figure. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 2nd Embodiment, and is the plan perspective view which the upper flat plate is folded back to the surface of the lower flat plate along the reference bending straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 2nd Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a perspective view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 2nd Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a plan view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL of FIG. 51. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 2nd Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a perspective view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 2nd Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a top view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM of FIG. 55. It is a perspective view which shows the cushioning material for packing which was assembled and packed, and the packing box in the cushioning material for packing of 2nd Embodiment. In the packing cushioning material of the second embodiment, it is a top view which stored the packing cushioning material which was assembled and packed inside the packing box. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 58. It is a front plan view (developed table plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a back plan view (developed back plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a plan perspective view (developed table perspective view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 61. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 2nd Embodiment, and is the front plane which loaded the article (commodity) on the packing cushioning material (the first presser sheet part and the loading holding flat plate part) in the unfolded state. It is a perspective view. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 3rd Embodiment, and is the plan perspective view which the upper flat plate is folded back to the surface of the lower flat plate along the reference bending straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 3rd Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a perspective view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 3rd Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a plan view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. 69. FIG. 6 is a sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 69. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 3rd Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a perspective view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 3rd Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a top view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT of FIG. 73. It is a perspective view which shows the cushioning material for packing which was assembled and packed, and the packing box in the cushioning material for packing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view which stored the cushioning material for packing which assembled and packed in the cushioning material for packing of 3rd Embodiment inside a packing box. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT of FIG. 73. It is a front plan view (developed table plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 4th Embodiment. It is a back plan view (developed back plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 4th Embodiment. It is a plan perspective view (developed table perspective view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 4th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing aa of FIG. 79. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line bb of FIG. 79. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line cc of FIG. 79. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line dd of FIG. 79. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 4th Embodiment, and is the front plan perspective view which loaded the article (commodity) on the packing cushioning material (the first presser sheet part) in the expanded state. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 4th Embodiment, and is the plan perspective view which the upper flat plate was loaded (laminated) on the surface of the lower flat plate. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 4th Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a perspective view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 4th Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a plan view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-e of FIG. 88. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line ff of FIG. 88. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 4th Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a perspective view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 4th Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a top view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line gg of FIG. 92. It is a perspective view which shows the cushioning material for packing which was assembled and packed, and the packing box in the cushioning material for packing of 4th Embodiment. It is a top view which stored the cushioning material for packing which was assembled and packed in the cushioning material for packing of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line hh of FIG. It is a front plan view (developed table plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 5th Embodiment. It is a back plan view (developed back plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 5th Embodiment. It is a plan perspective view (developed table perspective view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line i-i of FIG. 98. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line jk of FIG. 98. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line kk of FIG. 98. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 98. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 5th Embodiment, and is the front plane perspective which loaded the article (commodity) on the packing cushioning material (the first presser sheet part and the loading reinforcement flat plate) in the unfolded state. It is a figure. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 5th Embodiment, and is the plan perspective view which the upper flat plate was loaded (laminated) on the surface of the lower flat plate. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 5th Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a perspective view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 5th Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a plan view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line of FIG. 107. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line n—n of FIG. 107. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 5th Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a perspective view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 5th Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a top view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-o of FIG. 111. It is a perspective view which shows the cushioning material for packing which was assembled and packed, and the packing box in the cushioning material for packing of 5th Embodiment. It is a top view which stored the cushioning material for packing which assembled and packed in the cushioning material for packing of 5th Embodiment inside a packing box. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line pp of FIG. 114. It is a front plan view (developed table plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 6th Embodiment. It is a back plan view (developed back plan view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 6th Embodiment. It is a plan perspective view (developed table perspective view) which shows the cushioning material for packing of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line qq of FIG. 117. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line r—r of FIG. 117. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line s—s of FIG. 117. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 117. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 6th Embodiment, and is the front plane which loaded the article (commodity) on the packing cushioning material (the first presser sheet part and the loading holding flat plate part) in the unfolded state. It is a perspective view. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 6th Embodiment, and is the plan perspective view which the upper flat plate was loaded (laminated) on the surface of the lower flat plate. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 6th Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a perspective view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 6th Embodiment, and the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are bent to the back side of the loading flat plate part along each 1st bending straight line. It is a plan view which the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are bent toward the surface side of the holding flat plate along each 7th folding straight line. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line u-u of FIG. 126. It is a vv cross-sectional view of FIG. 126. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 6th Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a perspective view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. It is a figure explaining the assembly packing method in the packing cushioning material of 6th Embodiment, the 1st and 2nd lower leg flat plates are erected, the 1st and 2nd upper leg flat plates are erected, and each lower side It is a top view which raised up the rising flat plate part and each upper rising flat plate part, and raised up by folding back each 1st to 4th shape-retaining flat plates. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 130. It is a perspective view which shows the cushioning material for packing which was assembled and packed, and the packing box in the cushioning material for packing of the 6th Embodiment. In the packing cushioning material of the sixth embodiment, it is a top view in which the packing cushioning material assembled and packed is stored inside the packing box. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line xx of FIG. 133.

The packing cushioning materials of the first to sixth embodiments according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 134.

<First Embodiment>
The packing cushioning material X1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41.
For convenience of explanation, first, the packed cushioning material X1 of the first embodiment developed before assembly will be described, and then the packing cushioning material X1 of the first embodiment will be assembled to pack the article (commodity). The procedure (assembly and packing method) to be performed will be explained.

In FIGS. 1 to 40, the packing cushioning material X1 of the first embodiment (hereinafter referred to as "packing cushioning material X1") includes a basic flat plate body 1 and a pressing sheet 2 (pressing film).

<Foundation flat plate 1>
The basic flat plate 1 is formed of bendable paper, a sheet material (sheet material) such as synthetic resin, for example, corrugated cardboard (paper corrugated cardboard sheet), plastic corrugated cardboard, and the like. As shown in FIG. 4, the foundation flat plate body 1 has a predetermined plate thickness T.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the foundation flat plate 1 has a plate upper edge 1A, a plate lower edge 1B, and a pair of left and right plate side edges 1C and 1D (right plate side edge 1C, left plate side edge 1D). ).

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the plate upper edge 1A and the plate lower edge 1B of the foundation flat plate 1 are arranged in parallel with each other with a plate edge spacing PW (distance) in the vertical direction UD.
As shown in FIG. 2, the plate side edges 1C and 1D of the foundation flat plate 1 are arranged in the left-right direction LR with a plate edge spacing PV (distance). The plate side edges 1C and 1D extend between the plate upper edge 1A and the plate lower edge 1B in the vertical direction UD. The plate side edges 1C and 1D intersect the plate upper edge 1A and the plate lower edge 1B.
The left-right direction LR is a direction orthogonal to the vertical direction UD.
As shown in FIG. 2, the basic flat plate body 1 is formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical plate center line CL1 of the plate edge spacing PV in the left-right direction LR.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the foundation flat plate body 1 has a reference bent straight line LX (reference straight line) and a pair of left and right reference cut straight lines LY and LY.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the reference bending straight line LX is arranged between the plate upper edge 1A and the plate lower edge 1B in the vertical direction UD. The reference bent straight line LX is arranged in parallel to the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1 with an upper plate spacing PX (upper plate distance) in the vertical direction UD. The reference bent straight line LX is arranged in parallel to the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 with a lower plate spacing PY (lower plate distance) in the vertical direction UD.
The reference bent straight line LX extends in the left-right direction LR in parallel with the plate upper edge 1A and the plate lower edge 1B of the foundation flat plate body 1. The reference bent straight line lX intersects the plate side edges 1C and 1D of the foundation flat plate body 1.

Each reference cut line LY, LY is formed on the reference folding curve LX as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 7. Each reference cut straight line LY, LY has a cut length ly from each plate side edge 1C, 1D of the foundation flat plate body 1 and extends in the left-right direction LR. Each reference cut straight line LY, LY has a cut length ly shorter than the straight line length of the reference bent straight line LX in the left-right direction LR.
The reference cut straight lines LY and LY intersect the plate side edges 1C and 1D of the foundation plate body 1 in the left-right direction LR and open to the plate side edges 1C and 1D of the foundation plate body 1. Each reference cut straight line LY, LY penetrates the foundation flat plate body 1 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) and opens to the front surface 1X (front plane) and the back surface 1Y (back plane) of the foundation flat plate body 1.
The front-rear direction FR is the plate thickness direction of the foundation flat plate body 1 and is a direction orthogonal to the vertical direction UD and the horizontal direction LR.

In the foundation flat plate body 1, each plate side edge 1C, 1D has a pair of left and right plate lower side edges 3C, 3D, and a pair of left and right plate upper edges 4C, 4D, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The lower plate lower edges 3C and 3D are located between the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 and the reference bent straight line LX (each reference cut straight line LY, LY) in the vertical direction UD. The lower plate lower edges 3C and 3C intersect the plate lower edge 1B of the foundation flat plate 1 and the reference bent straight line LX (each reference cut straight line LY, LY).
The upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate are located between the upper edge 1A of the base plate 1 and the reference bent straight line LX (each reference cut straight line LY, LY) in the vertical direction UD. The plate upper edges 4C and 4D intersect the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate 1 and the reference bending straight line LX (each reference cut straight line LY, LY).

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 28, the foundation flat plate 1 is composed of a lower flat plate 3 and an upper flat plate 4. In the foundation flat plate body 1, the reference bent straight line LX (each reference cut straight line LY, LY) is a boundary line between the lower flat plate 3 and the upper flat plate 4 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

<Lower flat plate 3>
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the lower plate 3 has a reference bent straight line LX, a plate lower edge 1B of the foundation plate body 1, and each plate side edge 1C, 1D (each plate lower edge 3C of the lower plate 3). , 3D).
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the lower plate 3 is a plate upper edge 3A including a reference bent straight line LX and each reference cut straight line LY, LY, and a plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1. It has an edge 3B and a pair of left and right lower edge edges 3C and 3D.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the lower flat plate 3 is formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical plate center line CL1. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the lower flat plate 3 is formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the horizontal plate center line CL1 having a plate edge spacing PY in the vertical direction UD.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 7 to 12, the lower flat plate 3 has a pair of upper and lower first bent straight lines L1, L1 (first straight line) and a pair of left and right second bent straight lines L2, L2. (2nd straight line), left and right pair of 3rd folding straight lines L3, L3 (3rd straight line), left and right pair of 4th folding straight lines L4, L4 (4th straight line), left and right pair of 5th folding straight lines L5 L5 (fifth straight line), pair of left and right sixth bent straight lines L6, L6 (sixth straight line), pair of left and right first lower bent holes 5, 5 and pair of left and right second lower bent holes 6, Has 6.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the first bending straight lines L1 and L1 (the upper first bending straight line L1 and the lower first bending straight line L1) are UBs in the vertical direction. In, it is arranged between the reference bent straight line LX (the upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3) and the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1 (the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). Each of the first bent straight lines L1 and L1 is the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3) in the vertical direction UD. ) Are arranged in parallel with a first interval P1 (first distance).
As shown in FIG. 7, the upper first bent straight line L1 is arranged in parallel with the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3) in the vertical direction UD with a first interval P1. As shown in FIG. 8, the lower first bending straight line L1 is separated from the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) by the first interval P1 in the vertical direction UD. Arranged in parallel.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the first bending straight lines L1 and L1 are arranged in parallel with each other at a second interval P2 (second distance) in the vertical direction UD. The first bent straight lines L1 and L1 are parallel to the reference bent straight line LX (upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3) and the lower edge 1B of the foundation plate 1 (lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). , Extends to the left-right LR.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 7, each of the second folding straight lines L2 and L2 has a first interval P1 separated from the reference bending straight line LX and the reference bending straight line LX in the vertical direction UD. It is arranged between the folding straight lines P1 (the first folding straight line L1 on the upper side).
As shown in FIG. 7, the second bent straight lines L2 and L2 are the lower side edges 3C and 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower edges 3J and 3K of the third plate) in the left-right direction LR, respectively. It is arranged at a distance of a third interval P3 (third distance). The second bending straight lines L2 and L2 are arranged in parallel with each other at a fifteenth interval P15 (15th distance) in the left-right direction LR.
Each of the second bent straight lines L2 and L2 extends in the vertical direction UD, and the first interval P1 is separated from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3) and the reference bent straight line LX. It is orthogonal to the folding straight line L1 (the first folding straight line on the upper side). The second bending straight lines L2 and L2 are orthogonal to each of the reference cut straight lines LY and LY in the vertical direction UD.
As shown in FIG. 7, the second bent straight line L2 on the right side is separated from the lower plate lower edge 3C of the lower flat plate 3 (the lower side edge portion 3J of the third plate on the right side) by the third interval P3 in the left-right direction LR. Is placed. As shown in FIG. 7, the second bent straight line L2 on the left side is separated by the third interval P3 from the lower plate lower edge 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower side edge 3K of the third plate on the left side) in the left-right direction LR. Is placed.

Each of the third folding straight lines L3 and L3 (the third folding straight line L3 on the right side and the folding straight line L3 on the left side) is a basic flat plate body in the vertical direction UD as shown in FIGS. It is arranged between the lower edge 1B of the plate 1 (lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and the first bending straight line L1 (lower first bending straight line) separating the first interval P1 from the lower edge 1B of the plate. To.
As shown in FIG. 8, each of the third bent straight lines L3 and L3 is each of the lower side edges 3C and 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower edges 3L and 3M of the fourth plate) in the left-right direction LR. Is arranged at a distance of a third interval P3. The third bending straight lines L3 and L3 are arranged in parallel with each other at a distance of 15th P15 (15th distance) in the left-right direction LR.
Each of the third bent straight lines L3 and L3 extends in the vertical direction UD, and the first interval P1 is provided on the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and the plate lower edge 1B. It is orthogonal to the first bending straight line L1 (lower first bending straight line) that separates them.
As shown in FIG. 8, the third bent straight line L3 on the right side is separated by the third interval P3 from the lower plate lower edge 3C of the lower plate 3 (the lower side edge 3L of the fourth plate on the right side) in the left-right direction LR. Is placed. As shown in FIG. 8, the third bent straight line L3 on the left side is separated by the third interval P3 from the lower plate lower edge 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower side edge 3M of the fourth plate on the left side) in the left-right direction LR. Is placed.
The third bent straight lines L3 and L3 are arranged at the same positions as the second bent straight lines L2 and L2 from the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR.

Each of the 4th folding straight lines L4 and L4 (4th folding straight line L4 on the right side and 4th folding straight line L4 on the left side) is in the vertical direction UD as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 7 and 8. , Arranged between the first bending straight lines L1 and L1.
As shown in FIG. 7, each of the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4 is each of the lower side edges 3C and 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower edges 3R and 3S of the seventh plate) in the left-right direction LR. It is arranged at a distance of a fourth interval P4 (fourth distance). As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, each of the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4 is the lower edge 3C, 3D of each plate of the lower plate 3 (7th plate lower edge 3R, 3S) in the left-right direction LR. The second folding straight line L2, L2 and the third folding straight line L3, L3 are positioned and arranged between the two.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, each of the fourth folding straight lines L4 and L4 has a fifth interval P5 for each of the second folding straight lines L2 and L2 and each of the third folding straight lines L3 and L3. They are arranged in parallel with a (fifth distance) in between. The fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4 extend in the vertical direction UD and are orthogonal to the first bent straight lines L1 and L1.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side has a fourth interval in the left-right direction LR at the lower plate lower edge 3C of the lower plate 3 (the lower side edge 3R of the seventh plate on the right side). It is arranged across P4. The fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side is the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the second bent straight line L2 on the right side between the lower plate 3 and the lower plate lower edge 3C (7th plate lower side edge 3R) in the left-right direction LR. The three folding straight lines L3 are located and arranged parallel to the second folding straight line L2 on the right side with a fifth interval P5, and parallel to the third folding straight line L3 on the right side with a fifth interval P5. To.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side has a fourth spacing in the lower plate lower edge 3D (the lower side edge portion 3S of the seventh plate on the left side) in the left-right direction LR. It is arranged across P4. The fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side is the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the second bent straight line L2 on the left side between the lower plate 3 and the lower plate lower edge 3D (7th plate lower side edge 3S) in the left-right direction LR. 3 Folded straight lines L3 are located and arranged parallel to the 2nd bent straight line L2 on the left side with a 5th interval P5, and parallel to the 5th interval P5 of the 3rd folded straight line L3 on the left side. To.
The fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4 are arranged in parallel with each other at the 16th interval P16 (16th distance) in the left-right direction LR.

The 5th folding straight lines L5 and L5 (the 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side and the 5th folding straight line L5 on the left side) are left and right as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 7, 9, and 10. In the direction LR, it is arranged between each plate lower edge 3C, 3D (each seventh plate lower edge 3R, 3S) of the lower plate 3 and each fourth bent straight line L4, L4. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, each of the fifth folding straight lines L5 and L5 is a first folding straight line L1 (upper first bending straight line) that separates the first interval P1 from the reference folding straight line LX, and At each of the first intersections Q1 and Q1 with each of the fourth folding straight lines L4 and L4, it extends from each of the first intersections Q1 and Q1.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 9 and 10, each of the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 has a first acute angle θ1 (acute angle) for each of the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4. From each of the first intersections Q1 and Q1, the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1 (the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and the lower edges 3C and 3D of the lower plate 3 (3R of the lower edge 3R of each 7th plate). , 3S) are extended to each. The fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 are the lower edges 3C and 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower edges 3N and 3O of the fifth plate and the lower edges 3R and 3S of the seventh plate), respectively. Cross to.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 9, the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side has a first acute angle θ1 on the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side, and is based on the first intersection Q1 on the right side. It extends toward the plate lower edge 1B of the flat plate body 1 (plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and the plate lower edge 3C of the lower plate 3 (the lower plate lower edge 3R of the 7th plate on the right side), and is the plate on the right side. Crosses the lower edge 3C.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 10, the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side has a first acute angle θ1 on the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side, and is based on the first intersection Q1 on the left side. It extends toward the plate lower edge 1B of the flat plate 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and the plate lower edge 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower plate lower edge 3S of the 7th plate on the left side), and is the plate on the left side. Crosses the lower edge 3D.
The first acute angle θ1 is set to more than θ1 = 0 degrees (0 °) and less than θ1 = 90 degrees (90 °), for example, θ1 = 60 degrees (60 °).

Each 6th folding straight line L6, L6 (6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side) is left and right as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 8, 11, and 12. In the direction LR, it is arranged between each plate lower edge 3C, 3D (each seventh plate lower edge 3R, 3S) of the lower plate 3 and each fourth bent straight line L4, L4. Each of the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 is a first bent straight line L1 that separates the first interval P1 from the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1 (the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3), and each fourth bent line. At each of the second intersections Q2 and Q2 with the straight lines L4 and L4, they extend from each of the second intersections Q2 and Q2.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 11 and 12, each of the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 has a first acute angle θ1 with respect to each of the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4. From each of the two intersections Q2 and Q2 to the reference bent straight line LX (plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3) and each plate lower edge 3C, 3D (each seventh plate lower edge 3R, 3S) of the lower plate 3. It is postponed toward. The sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 intersect each of the lower side edges 3C and 3D of the lower plate 3.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 11, the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side has a first acute angle θ1 (acute angle) on the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side, and the second on the right side. It extends from the intersection Q2 toward the reference bent straight line LX and the lower edge 3C of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 3R of the seventh plate on the right side), and intersects the lower edge 3C of the right plate. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 12, the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side has a first acute angle θ1 on the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side, and is referred to from the second intersection Q2 on the left side. It extends toward the bent straight line LX and the lower edge 3D of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 3S of the seventh plate on the left side), and intersects the lower edge 3D of the left plate.

Each of the first lower bent holes 5 and 5 (the first lower bent hole 5 on the right side and the first lower bent hole 5 on the left side) is shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIG. 7, FIG. 9, and FIG. As shown in, the portion of each of the second folding straight lines L2 and L2 on the first folding straight line L1 side, the portion of each of the fourth folding straight lines L4 and L4 on the first intersection Q1 and Q1 side, and each fifth folding. It is arranged over the first intersections Q1 and Q1 sides of the curved straight lines L5 and L5, and the first intersections Q1 and Q1. Open to 3X (front plane) and back 3Y.
Each of the first lower folding holes 5 and 5 is a portion of each of the second folding straight lines L2 and L2 on the first bending straight line L1 side, and each of the fourth folding straight lines L4 and L4 on the first intersection Q1 and Q1 side. The lower plate 3 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) at each of the first intersections Q1 and Q1 side of each of the fifth bending straight lines L5 and L5 and each of the first intersections Q1 and Q1.
As a result, the first bent straight line L1 that separates the first interval P1 from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3), the second bent straight lines L2 and L2, and the fourth bent straight lines L4. L4, each fifth folding straight line L1, L1 is adjacent (continuous) to each first lower bending hole 5, 5.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the first lower folding hole 5 on the right side is a portion of the second folding straight line L2 on the right side on the first bending straight line L1 side, and the fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side. At the portion on the right side of the first intersection Q1, the portion on the right side of the fifth folding straight line L5 on the right side of the first intersection Q1, and the portion on the right side of the first intersection Q1, the lower flat plate 3 is placed in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction). Penetrate.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 10, the first lower folding hole 5 on the left side is a portion of the second folding straight line L2 on the left side on the first bending straight line L1 side, and the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side. At the portion on the left side of the first intersection Q1, the portion on the left side of the fifth folding straight line L5 on the left side of the first intersection Q1, and the portion on the left side of the first intersection Q1, the lower flat plate 3 is placed in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction). Penetrate.
Each of the first lower bent holes 5 and 5 is, for example, a fan-shaped hole (circular hole) centered on each of the first intersections Q1 and Q1, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 7 and 10. Therefore, in the left-right direction LR, it is formed between the lower side edges 3C and 3D of the lower plate 3 and the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4, and the upper first bent straight line L1 and each second folded line. It is adjacent (continuously) to the curved straight lines L2 and L2, the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4, and the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5.

The second lower bent holes 6 and 6 (the second lower bent hole 6 on the right side and the second lower bent hole 6 on the left side) are shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 8, 11, and 12. As shown in, the portion of each third folding straight line L3, L3 on the first bending straight line L1, the portion of each fourth folding straight line L4, L4 on the second intersection Q2, Q2 side, each sixth folding. It is arranged over each of the second intersections Q2 and Q2 side of the curved straight lines L6 and L6, and each of the second intersections Q2 and Q2, and penetrates the lower plate 3 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) of the lower plate 3. It opens on the front surface 3X and the back surface 3Y.
Each of the second lower folding holes 6 and 6 is a portion of the first bending straight line L1 of each third folding straight line L3 and L3, and each second intersection Q2 and Q2 side of each fourth folding straight line L2 and L2. The lower plate 3 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) at each of the second intersections Q2 and Q2 side of each of the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6, and each of the second intersections Q2 and Q2.
As a result, the first bending straight line L1 separating the first interval P1 from the plate lower edge 1B of the foundation flat plate 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3), each third folding straight line L3, L3, and each fourth folding. The curved straight lines L4 and L4 and the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 are adjacent to (continuously) the second lower bent holes 6 and 6 respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, the second lower folding hole 6 on the right side is a portion of the third folding straight line L3 on the right side on the first bending straight line L1 side, and the fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side. It is arranged over the part on the right side of the second intersection Q2, the part on the right side of the sixth bending straight line L6 on the right side of the second intersection Q2, and the part on the right side of the second intersection Q2, and the lower plate 3 is arranged in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction). ).
As shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, the second lower folding hole 6 on the left side is a portion of the third folding straight line L3 on the left side on the first bending straight line L1 side, and the left side of the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side. The lower plate 3 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) at the second intersection Q2 side portion of the left side, the second intersection Q2 side portion on the left side of the sixth bending straight line L6 on the left side, and the second intersection Q2 on the left side. do.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 7 and 10, for example, each of the second lower bent holes 6 and 6 is a fan-shaped hole (circular hole) centered on each of the second intersections Q2 and Q2. Therefore, in the left-right direction LR, it is formed between the lower side edges 3C, 3D of the lower plate 3 and the fourth bent straight lines L4, L4, and the lower first bent straight line L1, each third. It is adjacent (continuously) to the bent straight lines L3 and L3, the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4, and the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6.

In the lower flat plate 3, the plate upper edge 3A, which is the reference bending straight line LX, is first in the upper first bending straight line L1 in the vertical direction UD, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 13 to 15. They are arranged in parallel with an interval P1 (first distance).
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 15 and 16, the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 extends in the left-right direction LR and is continuous with the lower plate lower edges 3C and 3D. The plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 has a plate edge length α1 (same edge length) on both sides (right side, left side) from the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR, and each second bent straight line L2. , L2 and the lower plate 3 extend between the lower edges 3C and 3D of each plate.

In the lower flat plate 3, the lower plate edge 3B (the lower plate edge 1B of the basic flat plate body 1) is the lower side in the vertical direction UD as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 13, 16 and 17. It is arranged in parallel to the one-fold straight line L1 with a first interval P1 (first distance). The plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 extends in the left-right direction LR and is continuous with the plate lower edge 3C and 3D. The plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 has a plate edge length α1 (same plate edge length) on both sides (right side, left side) from the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR, and each third bent straight line. It extends between the lower edges 3C and 3D of each of L3, L3 and the lower plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, the lower flat plate 3 has a pair of left and right first plate lower edge portions 3F, 3G, a pair of left and right second plate lower edge portions 3H, 3I, and a pair of left and right third plate lower portions. Side edge 3J, 3K, left and right pair of 4th plate lower edge 3L, 3M, left and right pair of 5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O, left and right pair of 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q and left and right It has a pair of 7th plate lower edge portions 3R, 3S.

As shown in FIG. 13, the lower plate lower edge 3C (right side plate lower edge) of the lower plate 3 is the first plate lower edge portion 3F on the right side, the second plate lower side edge portion 3H on the right side, and the right side. 3rd plate lower edge 3J, right 4th plate lower edge 3L, right 5th plate lower edge 3N, right 6th plate lower edge 3P and right 7th plate lower edge It is composed of a portion 3R, and is between the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 (reference bent straight line LX) and the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1) in the vertical direction UD. Be placed.
The lower plate side edge 3C is continuous with the right end of the upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 and the right end of the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 in the left-right direction LR.

As shown in FIG. 13, the lower plate lower edge 3D (left side plate lower edge) of the lower plate 3 is the left side first plate lower edge portion 3G, the left side second plate lower edge portion 3I, and the left side. 3K lower edge 3K, 4th lower edge 3M on the left, 5th lower edge 3O on the left, 6th lower edge 3Q on the left and 7th lower edge on the left It is composed of parts 3S and is arranged between the upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 (reference bent straight line LX) and the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (lower edge 1B of the base plate 1) in the vertical direction UD. Will be done.
The lower plate side edge 3D is continuous with the left end of the upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 and the left end of the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 in the left-right direction LR.

In the lower plate 3, the lower edges 3C and 3D of each plate are symmetrical with respect to the vertical plate center line CL1 as shown in FIGS. 2 and 13.

In each plate lower edge 3C, 3D, the first plate lower edge 3F, 3G (the first plate lower edge 3F on the right side, the first plate lower edge 3G on the left side) are shown in FIGS. 13 to 13 to FIG. As shown in 15, in the left-right direction LR, it is continuous with each edge end of the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3.
The lower edge portions 3F and 3G of the first plate extend from each of the third intersections Q3 and Q3 at the third intersections Q3 and Q3 with the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3. As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, each of the lower edge portions 3F and 3G of the first plate has a third acute angle θ3 on the upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 and each of the third intersections Q3 and Q3. It extends toward the lower edge 3B of the lower flat plate 3 while being separated from each of the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the lower edge portion 3F of the first plate on the right side has a third acute angle θ3 on the upper edge 3A (reference bending straight line LX) of the lower plate 3 and the third plate on the right side. It extends from the three intersections Q3 toward the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1) while being separated from each fourth bent straight line L4.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, the lower edge portion 3G of the first plate on the left side has a third acute angle θ3 on the upper edge 3A (reference bending straight line LX) of the lower plate 3 and the second plate on the left side. It extends from the three intersections Q3 toward the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1) while being separated from each fourth bent straight line L4.
The third acute angle θ3 is greater than θ3 = 0 degrees (0 °) and less than θ3 = 90 degrees (90 °). The third acute angle θ3 is, for example, the same angle as the first acute angle θ1 and is set to θ3 = 60 degrees (60 °) [θ1 = θ3 = 60 degrees (60 °)].

In each plate lower edge 3C, 3D, the second plate lower edge 3H, 3I (the second plate lower edge 3H on the right side, the second plate lower edge 3I on the left side) are shown in FIGS. As shown in 16 and FIG. 17, in the left-right direction LR, the lower plate 3 is continuous with each edge of the lower edge 3B of the plate.
The lower edge portions 3H and 3I of the second plate extend from each of the fourth intersections Q4 and Q4 at the fourth intersections Q4 and Q4 with the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3. As shown in FIGS. 13, 16 and 17, each of the second plate lower edge portions 3H and 3I has a third acute angle with respect to the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (plate lower edge 1B of the foundation plate body 1). It is extended toward the plate upper edge 3A (reference bending straight line LX) of the lower flat plate 3 while forming θ3 and separating from each of the fourth intersections Q4 and Q4 to each of the fourth bending straight lines L4 and L4.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 16, the lower edge portion 3H of the second plate on the right side has a third acute angle θ3 on the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1). , It extends toward the plate upper edge 3A (reference bending straight line LX) of the lower flat plate 3 while being separated from the fourth intersection Q4 on the right side to each fourth folding straight line L4.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 17, the second plate lower edge portion 3I on the left side has a third acute angle θ3 with the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (the plate lower edge 1B of the foundation plate body 1). , It extends toward the plate upper edge 3A (reference bending straight line LX) of the lower flat plate 3 while being separated from the fourth intersection Q4 on the left side to each fourth folding straight line L4.

In each plate lower edge 3C, 3D, each third plate lower edge 3J, 3K is each edge end (each) of each first plate lower edge 3F, 3G, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 15. Continuous to the bottom edge).
The lower edge portions 3J and 3K of the third plate are from the lower edge portions 3F and 3G of the first plate to the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1) in the vertical direction UD. It is postponed toward. Each third plate lower edge portion 3J, 3K has a plate edge length α2 from each first plate lower edge portion 3F, 3G in the vertical direction UD, and has a plate lower edge 3B side (base) of the lower plate 3. It extends to the lower edge 1B side of the flat plate body 1). The lower edge portions 3J and 3K of the third plate are arranged in parallel with the fourth folding straight line L4 and L4 (each second folding straight line L2 and L2).
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the lower edge portion 3J of the third plate on the right side has the lower edge portion 3B of the lower plate 3 (base plate body) from the lower edge portion 3F of the first plate on the right side in the vertical direction UD. It is extended toward the lower edge 1B) of 1.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, the left third plate lower edge portion 3K has a plate lower edge 3B (basic plate body) of the lower plate 3 from the left first plate lower edge portion 3G in the vertical direction UD. It is extended toward the lower edge 1B) of 1.

In each plate lower edge 3C, 3D, each fourth plate lower edge 3L, 3M is each edge of each second plate lower edge 3H, 3I, as shown in FIGS. 13, 16 and 17. Continuous to the edges (top of each edge).
The lower edge portions 3L and 3M of the fourth plate extend from the lower edge portions 3H and 3I of the second plate toward the upper edge 3A (reference bent straight line LX) of the lower plate 3 in the vertical direction UD. Will be done. The lower edge portions 3L and 3M of the fourth plate have a plate edge length α1 from the lower edge portions 3H and 3I of the second plate in the vertical direction UD, and the upper edge 3A side of the lower plate 3 (reference). It extends to the bent straight line LX side). The lower edge portions 3L and 3M of the fourth plate are arranged in parallel with the fourth folding straight line L4 and L4 (each third folding straight line L3 and L3). The lower edge portions 3L and 3M of the fourth plate are arranged at the same positions as the lower edge portions 3J and 3K of the third plate in the left-right direction LR.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 16, the lower edge portion 3L of the fourth plate on the right side has a plate upper edge 3A (reference bending) of the lower plate 3 from the lower edge portion 3H of the second plate on the right side in the vertical direction UD. It is extended toward the straight line LX).
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 17, the left side fourth plate lower edge portion 3M has a plate upper edge 3A (reference bending) of the lower plate 3 from the left side second plate lower edge portion 3I in the vertical direction UD. It is extended toward the straight line LX).

In each plate lower edge 3C, 3D, each fifth plate lower edge 3N, 3O is each edge end of each third plate lower edge 3J, 3K, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 15. Continuous to the bottom edge).
As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, each of the 5th plate lower edge portions 3N and 3O has a 5th intersection Q5 at each 5th intersection Q5 and Q5 with each of the 3rd plate lower edge portions 3J and 3K. , Q5 are postponed from each.
The lower edge portions 3N and 3O of the fifth plate pass through the fifth intersections Q5 and Q5, and are parallel to the first bending straight lines L1 and L1 (the upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3). A fourth acute angle θ4 (acute angle) is formed on the straight line Lα, and the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1) and the fifth fold each from each of the fifth intersections Q5 and Q5. It is extended toward the curved lines L5 and L5. As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the lower edge portions 3N and 3O of each fifth plate intersect each fifth bending straight line L5 and L5.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the lower edge portion 3N of the fifth plate on the right side has a fourth acute angle θ4 on the first edge reference straight line Lα, and the plate of the lower plate 3 is formed from the fifth intersection Q5 on the right side. It extends toward the lower edge 3B (the lower edge 1B of the basic flat plate 1) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side, and intersects the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, the lower edge portion 3O of the fifth plate on the left side has a fourth acute angle θ4 on the first edge reference straight line Lα, and the plate of the lower plate 3 is formed from the fifth intersection Q5 on the left side. It extends toward the lower edge 3B (the lower edge 1B of the basic flat plate 1) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side, and intersects the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side.
The fourth acute angle θ4 is greater than θ4 = 0 degrees (0 °) and less than θ4 = 90 degrees (90 °), for example, half the angle of the third acute angle θ3 (θ4 = θ3 / 2). Set to. The fourth acute angle θ4 is set to θ4 = 30 degrees (30 °), for example, assuming that the third acute angle θ3 = 60 degrees (60 °).

In each plate lower edge 3C, 3D, each sixth plate lower edge 3P, 3Q is each edge of each fourth plate lower edge 3L, 3M, as shown in FIGS. 13, 16 and 17. Continuous to the edges (top of each edge).
As shown in FIGS. 13, 16 and 17, the lower edge portions 3P and 3Q of the sixth plate are each at the sixth intersection Q6 and Q6 with the lower edge portions 3L and 3M of the fourth plate. It is extended from 6 intersections Q6 and Q6.
The lower edge portions 3P and 3Q of the sixth plate pass through the sixth intersections Q6 and Q6, and form a fourth acute angle θ4 on the second edge reference straight line Lβ parallel to the first bending straight lines L1 and L1. Then, it extends from each of the sixth intersections Q6 and Q6 toward the plate upper edge 3A (reference bent straight line LX) of the lower flat plate 3 and each of the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6. The lower edge portions 3P and 3Q of the sixth plate intersect each of the sixth bending straight lines L6 and L6.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 16, the lower edge portion 3P of the sixth plate on the right side has a fourth acute angle θ4 on the second edge reference straight line Lβ, and the upper edge 3A (reference bend) of the lower plate 3 is formed. It extends toward the straight line LX) and the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, and intersects the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 17, the lower edge portion 3Q of the sixth plate on the left side has a fourth acute angle θ4 on the second edge reference straight line Lβ, and the upper edge 3A (reference bend) of the lower plate 3 is formed. It extends toward the straight line LX) and the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side, and intersects the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side.

In each plate lower edge 3C, 3D, each 7th plate lower edge 3R, 3S is each edge end (each) of each 5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 17. It is continuous with the lower end of the edge) and each edge edge (upper end of each edge) of each of the lower edge portions 3P and 3Q of the sixth plate.
As shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, each of the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R and 3S has a 7th intersection Q7 of each of the 5th plate lower edge portions 3N and 3O and each of the 5th bent straight lines L5 and L5. , Q7, and at the 8th intersections Q8 and Q8 of the 6th plate lower edge 3P and 3Q and the 6th bending straight lines L6 and L6, the 7th intersections Q7 and Q7 and the 8th intersections Q8 and Q8. Placed between.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 13, the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate are separated from each 4th bending straight line L4 and L4 by a 4th interval P4 (4th distance) in the left-right direction LR. Arranged in parallel. The lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate extend between the 7th intersections Q7 and Q7 and the 8th intersections Q8 and Q8 at the 8th intersections Q8 and Q8.
As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, each of the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R and 3S has each 5th plate lower edge portion 3N and 3O and each 5th bent straight line at each of the 7th intersections Q7 and Q7. Cross L5 and L5. The lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate intersect the lower edge portions 3P and 3Q of the 6th plate and the 6th bending straight lines L6 and L6 at the 8th intersections Q8 and Q8.
The lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate are arranged between the lower edge portions 3J and 3K of the third plate and the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4 in the left-right direction LR.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the lower edge portion 3R of the 7th plate on the right side extends between the 7th intersection Q7 on the right side and the 8th intersection Q8 on the right side, and at the 7th intersection Q7 on the right side. It intersects the lower edge 3N of the 5th plate on the right side and the 5th bending straight line L5 on the right side. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 16, the lower edge portion 3R of the 7th plate on the right side is connected to the lower edge portion 3P of the 6th plate on the right side and the 6th bending straight line L6 on the right side at the 8th intersection Q8 on the right side. Cross. The lower edge portion 3R of the seventh plate on the right side is arranged in parallel with the fourth bending straight line L4 on the right side with a fourth interval P4 (fourth distance) in the left-right direction LR.
As a result, the 4th bent straight line L4 on the right side has a 4th interval P4 (4th distance) on the 7th plate lower edge portion 3R of the plate lower side edge 3C (right side plate upper edge) in the left-right direction LR. They are arranged in parallel with each other.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, the lower edge portion 3S of the 7th plate on the left side extends between the 7th intersection Q7 on the left side and the 8th intersection Q8 on the left side, and at the 7th intersection Q7 on the left side. It intersects the lower edge 3O of the 5th plate on the left side and the 5th bending straight line L5 on the left side. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 17, the lower edge portion 3S of the 7th plate on the left side is connected to the lower edge portion 3Q of the 6th plate on the left side and the 6th bending straight line L6 on the left side at the 8th intersection Q8 on the left side. Cross. The lower edge portion 3S of the seventh plate on the left side is arranged in parallel with the fourth bending straight line L4 on the left side with a fourth interval P4 (fourth interval) in the left-right direction LR.
As a result, the 4th bent straight line L4 on the left side has a 4th interval P4 (4th interval) on the 7th plate lower edge portion 3S of the plate lower side edge 3D (left side plate lower side edge) in the left-right direction LR. Are arranged in parallel with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 8, the lower flat plate 3 includes a loading flat plate portion 7, a loading window hole 8, a first lower leg flat plate portion 9, a second lower leg flat plate portion 10, and a pair of left and right lower side risers. It is composed of flat plate portions 11 and 12, a pair of left and right first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14, and a pair of left and right second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16.

In the lower flat plate 3, the loading flat plate portion 7 is partitioned by the first bent straight lines L1 and L1 and the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The loading flat plate portion 7 is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction LR.

The loading window hole 8 is formed in the loading flat plate portion 7 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, 7 and 8. The loading window hole 8 is opened on the front surface 7X (front plane) and the back surface 7Y (back plane) of the loading flat plate portion 7 through the loading flat plate portion 7 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction).
The loading window hole 8 is formed in, for example, a rectangular window hole (rectangular or square window hole), and is opened on the front surface 7X and the back surface 7Y (front surface 1X and back surface 1Y of the foundation flat plate body 1) of the loading flat plate portion 7. ..
As shown in FIGS. 4, 5, 7, and 8, the loading window hole 8 includes a window hole upper edge 8A (loading window hole upper edge), a window hole lower edge 8B (loading window hole lower edge), and a window hole. It has a loading window edge consisting of a right edge 8C (right edge of the loading window hole) and a left edge of the window hole 8D (left edge of the loading window hole), and is formed in a rectangular window hole.
As shown in FIG. 7, the window hole upper edge 8A of the loading window hole 8 has a first bending straight line L1 on the upper side (the first interval P1 is separated from the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3) in the vertical direction UD. It is arranged in parallel with the bent straight line L1) with the first window hole spacing Pa. The window hole upper edge 8A extends in the left-right direction LR and is orthogonal to the window hole right edge 8C and the window hole left edge 8D.
As shown in FIG. 8, the window hole lower edge 8B of the loading window hole 8 has a first bending straight line L1 on the lower side (a first interval P1 is separated from the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) in the vertical direction UD. It is arranged in parallel with a first window hole spacing Pa (1 bent straight line). The lower edge 8B of the window hole extends in the left-right direction LR and is orthogonal to the right edge 8C of the window hole and the left edge 8D of the window hole.
In the loading window hole 8, the window hole upper edge 8A and the window hole lower edge 11B are arranged in parallel with each other with a second window hole spacing Pb in the vertical direction UD, as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the right edge 8C of the window hole of the loading window hole 8 is a fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side (a fourth bent straight line separating the fourth interval P4 from the lower edge 3C of the plate) in the left-right direction LR. ) Are arranged in parallel with a third window hole spacing Pc. The right edge 8C of the window hole extends in the vertical direction UD and is orthogonal to the upper edge 8A of the window hole and the lower edge 8B of the window hole.
As shown in FIG. 8, the left edge 8D of the window hole of the loading window hole 8 is a fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side (a fourth bent straight line separating the fourth interval P4 from the lower edge 3D of the plate) in the left-right direction LR. ) Are arranged in parallel with a third window hole spacing Pc. The left edge 8D of the window hole extends in the vertical direction UD and is orthogonal to the upper edge 8A of the window hole and the lower edge 8B of the window hole.
In the loading window hole 8, the window hole right edge 8C and the window hole left edge 8D are arranged in parallel with each other with a fourth window hole spacing Pd in the left-right direction LR, as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 7, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 has a reference bent straight line LX (plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3) and a reference bent straight line LX (lower plate 3). The plate upper edge 3A) is partitioned by a first bending straight line L1 (upper first bending straight line) separating the first interval P1 and each second folding straight line L2, L2. The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction LR.
The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is connected to the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3), the upper first bent straight line L1, and the second bent straight lines L2 and L2, respectively.
As a result, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is adjacent to the loading flat plate portion 7 along the upper first bending straight line L1 in the vertical direction UD, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and FIG. (Continuously installed) and arranged on the upper side of the loading flat plate portion 7.

In the lower flat plate 3, the upper first bent straight line L1 serves as a boundary (boundary line) between the loading flat plate portion 7 and the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 7. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 8, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 includes a plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and a plate of the foundation flat plate body 1. It is partitioned by a first bent straight line L1 (lower first bent straight line) separating the first interval P1 from the lower edge 1B (lower edge 3B of the lower flat plate), and each third bent straight line L3, L3. To. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 has the same shape as the first lower leg flat plate portion 9, and is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction LR. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is connected to the lower first bent straight line L1 and each third bent straight line L3, L3.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 8, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is adjacent to the loading flat plate portion 7 along the lower first bending straight line L1 in the vertical direction UD. It is (continuously installed) and arranged under the loading flat plate portion 7.

In the lower flat plate 3, the lower first bent straight line L1 is the boundary line between the loading flat plate portion 7 and the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 8. Become.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIGS. 4th bent flat plate portion L4, L4, each 5th bent straight line L5, L5, each 6th bent straight line L6, L6, and each plate lower edge 3C, 3D (each 7th plate lower side) It is partitioned by the edges 3R, 3S).
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 7 and 8, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 has a 4th folding straight line L4 on the right side, a 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side, and a 6th folding straight line on the right side. It is partitioned by L5 and the lower plate lower edge 3C (7th plate lower side edge portion 3R) of the lower plate 3.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 has a fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side, a fifth bent straight line L6 on the left side, and a sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side. , And the lower plate 3D (7th plate lower edge 3S) of the lower plate 3.
The lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are connected to each of the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4, the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5, and the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6.
As a result, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 (right side) is adjacent to (continuously installed) the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side in the left-right direction LR, and is on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7. Placed in.
The lower rising flat plate portion 12 (left side) is adjacent to (continuously installed) the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 on the left side in the left-right direction LR, and is arranged on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7. To.

In the lower flat plate 3, each of the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4 serves as a boundary (boundary line) between the loading flat plate portion 7 and the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

The first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 (the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side) are as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 7, 7, 9 and 10. In addition, each lower edge 3C, 3D of the lower plate 3 (each first plate lower edge 3F, 3G, each third plate lower edge 3J, 3K, each fifth plate lower edge 3N, 3O and 7th plate lower edge 3R, 3S), each reference notch straight line LY, LY (upper edge 3A of lower plate 3), each 2nd bent straight line L2, L2, and each 5th bent straight line L5. , L5.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIG. 7 and FIG. 9, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (right side) has a plate lower side edge 3C of the lower plate plate 3 (first plate lower side edge portion 3F, third plate). Lower edge 3J, 5th plate lower edge 3N and 7th plate lower edge 3R), right reference cut straight line LY, right 2nd bent straight line L2 and right 5th bent straight line L5 It is partitioned by.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIG. 7 and FIG. 10, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (left side) has a plate lower side edge 3D of the lower plate plate 3 (first plate lower side edge portion 3G, third plate). Lower edge 3K, 5th plate lower edge 3O and 7th plate lower edge 3S), left reference cut straight line LY, left 2nd bent straight line L2 and left 5th bent straight line L5 It is partitioned by.
The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (right side) is connected to the second bent straight line L2 on the right side. As a result, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is adjacent (continuously) to the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 along the second bending straight line L2 on the right side in the left-right direction LR, and the first lower leg It is arranged on the right side of the flat plate portion 9.
The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is connected to the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. As a result, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is adjacent to (continuously installed) the first lower side rising flat plate portion 11 along the fifth bending straight line L5 on the right side in the vertical direction UD, and is connected to the first lower side. It is arranged above the rising flat plate portion 11.
The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (left side) is connected to the second bent straight line L2 on the left side. As a result, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is adjacent (continuously) to the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 along the second bent straight line L2 on the left side in the left-right direction LR, and the first lower leg It is placed on the left side of the flat plate.
The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is connected to the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. As a result, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is adjacent to (continuously installed) the second lower side rising flat plate portion 12 along the fifth bending straight line L5 on the left side in the vertical direction UD, and the second lower side. It is arranged on the upper side of the rising flat plate portion 12.

In the lower flat plate 3, each of the second bent straight lines L2 and L2 is, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and FIG. 7, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13, 14 respectively. It becomes a boundary (boundary line).
In the lower flat plate 3, each of the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 has, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and FIG. It becomes the boundary (boundary line) of 14.

The second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 (the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side) are as shown in FIGS. In addition, the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge 1B of the basic plate 1), the lower edges 3C and 3D of each of the lower plates 3 (the lower edges 3H and 3I of each second plate, each fourth). Plate lower edge 3L, 3M, each 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q and each 7th plate lower edge 3R, 3S), each 3rd bent straight line L3, L3, and each 6th bent It is partitioned by straight lines L6 and L6.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 8 and 11, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (right side) has a plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 and a plate lower side edge 3C (second plate) of the lower plate 3. Lower edge 3H, 4th plate lower edge 3L, 6th plate lower edge 3P and 7th plate lower edge 3R), 3rd bending straight line L3 on the right side and 6th bending straight line on the right side It is partitioned by L6.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 8 and 12, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (left side) has a plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3 and a plate lower side edge 3D of the lower plate 3 (second plate lower). Side edge 3I, 4th plate lower edge 3M, 6th plate lower edge 3Q and 7th plate lower edge 3S), 3rd bent straight line L3 on the left side and 6th bent straight line L6 on the left side It is partitioned by.
The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (right side) is connected to the third bent straight line L3 on the right side. As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is adjacent (continuously provided) to the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 in the left-right direction LR, and is arranged on the right side of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10.
The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is connected to the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side. As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is adjacent (continuously) to the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side in the vertical direction UD, and is arranged below the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side. To.
The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (left side) is connected to the third bent straight line L3 on the left side. As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is adjacent (continuously provided) to the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 in the left-right direction LR, and is arranged on the left side of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10.
The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is connected to the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side. As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is adjacent (continuously) to the lower side rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side along the sixth bending straight line L6 on the left side in the vertical direction UD, and is on the lower side on the left side. It is arranged below the rising flat plate portion 12.

In the lower flat plate 3, each of the third bent straight lines L3 and L3 is the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 8. It becomes a boundary (boundary line).
In the lower flat plate 3, each of the sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 has, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and FIG. It becomes the boundary (boundary line) of 16.

<Upper plate 4>
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the upper plate 4 has a plate upper edge 1A of the foundation plate 1 (plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4) and a reference bent straight line LX (plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4). , And each plate side edge 1C, 1D (each plate upper edge 4C, 4D of the upper plate 4).
The upper plate 4 includes a plate upper edge 4A which is a plate upper edge 1A of the foundation plate body 1, a plate lower edge 4B including a reference bent straight line LX and each reference cut straight line LY, LY, and a pair of left and right plate upper edges. It has 4C and 4D. As shown in FIG. 4, the upper flat plate 4 has a plate thickness T.
As a result, the lower flat plate 3 and the upper flat plate 4 are integrally connected (adjacent) along the reference bending straight line LX in the vertical direction UD, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 2, the upper flat plate 4 is formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical plate center line CL1. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the upper flat plate 4 is formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the horizontal plate center line CL3 of the plate edge spacing PX in the vertical direction UD.
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper flat plate 4 has a lower flat plate along a reference bending straight line LX with the surface 4X (front plane) of the upper flat plate 4 facing the surface 3X (front plane) of the lower flat plate 3. Folded back to the surface 3X of 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18 to 23, the upper flat plate 4 has a pair of upper and lower 7th bent straight lines L7, L7 (7th straight line) and a pair of left and right 8th bent straight lines L8, L8 ( 8th straight line), a pair of left and right 9th bent straight lines L9, L9 (9th straight line), a pair of left and right 10th bent straight lines L10, L10 (10th straight line), and a pair of left and right 11th bent straight lines L11, L11. (11th straight line), left and right pair of 12th folding straight lines L12, L12 (12th straight line), left and right pair of 13th folding straight lines L13, 13 (13th straight line), left and right pair of 14th folding straight lines L14, It has L14 (14th straight line), a pair of left and right first upper bent holes 17, 17 and a pair of left and right second upper bent holes 18, 18.

The 7th folding straight lines L7 and L7 (the 7th folding straight line L7 on the upper side and the 7th folding straight line L7 on the lower side) are UD in the vertical direction as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19. In, a sixth interval P6 (sixth distance) is provided for each of the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1 (plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4) and the reference bending straight line LX (plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4). They are arranged in parallel with each other. The sixth interval P6 is set to a wider interval (P6> P1) than the first interval P1.
As shown in FIG. 18, the upper seventh bent straight line L7 is parallel to the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4) with a sixth interval P6 in the vertical direction UD. Be placed. As shown in FIG. 19, the lower seventh bent straight line L7 is arranged in parallel with the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4) at the sixth interval P6 in the vertical direction UD. ..
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the 7th folding straight lines L7 and L7 are arranged in parallel with each other at a 7th interval P7 (7th distance) in the vertical direction UD. Each of the seventh bent straight lines L7 and L7 extends in the left-right direction LR in parallel with the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 and the reference bent straight line LX.

The 8th folding straight lines L8 and L8 (8th folding straight line L8 on the right side and 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side) are based on the vertical UD as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 8. The 7th bent straight line L7 (upper 7th bent straight line) separating the 6th interval P1 from the plate upper edge 1A of the flat plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 3A of the upper flat plate 4) and the plate upper edge 1A of the basic flat plate body 1. It is arranged between L7).
As shown in FIG. 18, the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8 are formed on the upper edges 4C and 4D (upper edges 4J and 4K of the third plate) of the upper plate 4 in the left-right direction LR, respectively. It is arranged at 8 intervals P8 (8th distance). The eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8 are arranged in parallel with each other at the 16th interval P16 (16th distance) in the left-right direction LR.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18, each of the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8 is the upper edge 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper flat plate 4 and each second bent straight line L2 in the left-right direction LR. , Located between L2.
Each of the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8 extends in the vertical direction UD, and extends to the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4) and the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation plate body 1. It is orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line L7 (upper 7th folding straight line) separating the 6th interval P6.
As shown in FIG. 18, the eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side is arranged at the plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge portion 4J of the third plate on the right side) with the eighth interval P8 separated in the left-right direction LR. Will be done. The eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side is located between the plate upper edge 4C of the upper flat plate 4 and the second bent straight line L2 on the right side in the left-right direction lR and extends in the vertical direction UD. It is orthogonal to the plate upper edge 1A (plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) and the 7th folding straight line L7 (upper 7th folding straight line) that separates the plate upper edge 1A by the 6th interval.
As shown in FIG. 18, the eighth bent straight line L8 on the left side is arranged on the plate upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge portion 4K of the third plate on the left side) with the eighth interval P8 separated in the left-right direction LR. Will be done. The eighth bent straight line L8 on the left side is located between the plate upper edge 4D of the upper flat plate 4 and the second bent straight line L2 on the right side in the left-right direction LR and extends in the vertical direction UD. It is orthogonal to the plate upper edge 1A (plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) and the 7th folding straight line L7 (upper 7th folding straight line) separating the 6th interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A.

The 9th folding straight lines L9 and L9 (9th folding straight line L9 on the right side and 9th folding straight line L9 on the left side) are reference points in the vertical direction UD as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19. It is arranged between the bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4) and the 7th bent straight line L7 (the lower 7th bent straight line) separated by the 6th interval from the reference bent straight line LX.
As shown in FIG. 19, the 9th bent straight lines L9 and L9 are formed on the upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 (the upper edges 4L and 4M of the 4th plates) in the left-right direction LR, respectively. It is arranged at intervals of 8 intervals P8. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19, the 9th bent straight lines L9 and L9 are the upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 and the 2nd bent straight lines L2 in the left-right direction LR. It is located between L2. Each of the 9th bent straight lines L9 and L9 extends in the vertical direction UD, and the 7th interval P6 is separated from the plate lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper flat plate 4 and the reference bent straight line LX. It is orthogonal to the folding straight line L7. The 9th bending straight lines L9 and L9 are orthogonal to the reference cut straight lines LY and LY in the vertical direction UD.
As shown in FIG. 19, the ninth bent straight line L9 on the right side is arranged at the plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge portion 4L of the fourth plate on the right side) with the eighth interval P8 separated in the left-right direction LR. Will be done. The 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side is located between the plate upper edge 4C of the upper flat plate 4 and the 2nd bent straight line L2 on the right side in the left-right direction LR and extends in the vertical direction UD, and the reference cut on the right side is cut. It is orthogonal to the indented straight line LY and the 7th bent straight line L7 (lower 7th bent straight line L7) separated by the 6th interval from the reference bent straight line LX.
As shown in FIG. 19, the ninth bent straight line L) on the left side is separated from the plate upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge portion 4M of the fourth plate on the right side) by the eighth interval P8 in the left-right direction LR. Be placed. The 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side is located between the plate upper edge 4D of the upper flat plate 4 and the 2nd bent straight line L2 on the right side in the left-right direction LR and extends in the vertical direction UD, and the reference cut on the right side. It is orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line L7 (lower 7th folding straight line) that separates the 6th interval P6 from the built-in straight line LY and the reference bending straight line LX.
The 9th folding straight lines L9 and L9 are arranged at the same positions as the 8th folding straight lines L8 and L8 in the left-right direction LR.

The tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side) are in the vertical direction UD as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19. , Arranged between the 7th folding straight lines L7 and L7.
As shown in FIG. 18, the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10 are formed on the upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 (the upper edges 4R and 4S of the seventh plate) in the left-right direction LR, respectively. It is arranged at 9 intervals P9. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10 are the upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 (the upper edges 4R and 4S of the seventh plate) in the left-right direction LR. The 8th folding straight lines L8 and L8 and the 9th folding straight lines L9 and L9 are located and arranged in each of the spaces. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, each of the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 is formed between the eighth folding straight line L8 and L8 and the ninth folding straight line L9 and L9 in the left-right direction LR. They are arranged in parallel with an interval P10. The tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 extend in the vertical direction UD and are orthogonal to the seventh folding straight lines L7 and L7.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, each of the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 is a fourth folding of the lower plate 3 between the nineth folding straight lines L9 and L9 in the left-right direction LR. The straight lines L4 and L4 are located and arranged. As a result, the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 are arranged on the vertical plate center line CL1 side from the fourth folding straight lines L4 and L4 of the lower plate 3 in the left-right direction LR (each tenth folding straight line). L10 and L10 are arranged between the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4 of the lower plate 3 and the vertical plate center line CL1).
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the tenth bending straight line L10 on the right side has a ninth interval P9 on the plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge portion 4R of the seventh plate on the right side) in the left-right direction LR. Arranged apart. The 10th folding straight line L10 on the right side is located on the right side with the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side and the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side between the plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 in the left-right direction LR. It is arranged in parallel with the 8th folding straight line L8 and the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side with a 10th interval P10. The 10th folding straight line L10 on the right side extends in the vertical direction UD and is orthogonal to the 7th folding straight lines L7 and L7, respectively.
The tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side is arranged between the fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side of the lower plate 3 and the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR.
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the tenth bending straight line L10 on the left side has a ninth interval P9 on the plate upper edge 4D (the right side seventh plate upper edge 4S) of the upper plate 4 in the left-right direction LR. Arranged apart. The 10th folding straight line L10 on the left side is located on the right side with the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side and the 9th folding straight line L0 on the right side between the plate upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 in the left-right direction LR. It is arranged in parallel with the 8th folding straight line L8 and the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side with a 10th interval P10. The 10th folding straight line L10 on the left side extends in the vertical direction UR and is orthogonal to the 7th folding straight lines L7 and L7, respectively.
The tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side is arranged between the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side of the lower plate 3 and the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR.
The tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10 are arranged in parallel with each other at the 17th interval P17 (17th distance) in the left-right direction LR.

The 11th folding straight lines L11 and L11 (11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side) are left and right as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18, 20, and 21. In the direction LR, it is arranged between the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper plate 4 and the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10, respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, each of the eleventh bent straight lines L11 and L11 has a plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) and a plate upper edge of the foundation flat plate body 1. Of each of the 10th folding straight lines L10 and L10 extending between 1A (the upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) and the 7th folding straight line L7 (the upper 7th folding straight line L7) separating the 6th interval P6. At each of the first base points QA and QA on the extension line La, they are extended from each of the first base points QA and QA.
As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, each of the eleventh bent straight lines L1 and L1 has a second acute angle θ2 (acute angle) formed on each of the tenth bent straight lines L10 and L10, and each first base point QA. , QA extend toward the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4) and the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate 4 of the upper plate 4 (the upper edges 4R and 4S of the seventh plate). , Crosses each plate upper edge 4C, 4D (each seventh plate upper edge 4S, 4R) of the upper plate 4.
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the eleventh bent straight line L1 on the right side has a second acute angle θ2 on the tenth bent straight line L10 on the right side, and the reference bent straight line LX is formed from the first base point QA on the right side. (The lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4) and the upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge 4R of the 7th plate on the right side) are extended toward the upper edge 4C of the right plate (the upper edge 4C of the 7th plate). Cross 4R).
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 21, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side has a second acute angle θ2 on the 10th folding straight line L10 on the left side, and the reference bending straight line LX is formed from the first base point QA on the left side. (The lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4) and the upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge 4S of the 7th plate on the left side) are extended toward the upper edge 4D of the left plate (the upper edge 4D of the 7th plate). Cross 4S).
The second acute angle θ2 is greater than θ2 = 0 degrees (0 °) and less than θ2 = 90 degrees (90 °). The second acute angle θ2 is an angle equal to or greater than the first acute angle θ1, and is set to, for example, the same angle as the first acute angle θ1 [for example, θ2 = θ1 = 60 degrees (60 °)].

The twelfth folding straight lines L12 and L12 (the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side) are left and right as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18, 20, and 21. In the direction LR, it is arranged between the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper plate 4 and the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8.
The 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12 are located between the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) and the 11th bent straight lines L11 and L11 in the vertical direction UD. And are placed. As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the twelfth folding straight lines L12 and L12 are arranged in parallel to the eleventh folding straight lines L11 and L11 with a thirteenth interval P13 having a plate thickness T or more. As shown in FIGS. 18, 20, and 21, the twelfth bent straight lines L12 and L12 are the upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 (the upper edges 4N and 4O of the fifth plate and the seventh plate each). It intersects the upper edges 4R, 4S) and the eighth curved straight lines L8, L8, respectively.
The twelfth folding straight lines L12 and L12 are arranged in parallel with the eleventh folding straight lines L11 and L11 with a second acute angle θ2 on the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10.
As shown in FIG. 20, the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side is arranged in parallel with the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the right side with a thirteenth interval P13. The 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side intersects the plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 (the 5th plate upper edge portion 4N and the 7th plate upper edge portion 4R on the right side) and the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side.
As shown in FIG. 21, the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side is arranged in parallel with the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the left side with a thirteenth interval P13. The 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side intersects the plate upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 (the 5th plate upper edge portion 4O and the 7th plate upper edge portion 4S on the left side) and the 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side.
The thirteenth interval P13 is an interval of the plate thickness T or more of the foundation plate body 1 (lower plate 3), for example, the plate thickness T (one plate thickness) of the lower plate 3. The thirteenth interval P13 has a plate thickness T (one plate thickness) or more of the foundation plate body 1 (lower plate 3) or more and four times the plate thickness T or less (T ≦ P13 ≦ 4 × T), and further, the lower plate 3 It is also possible to make the plate thickness T more than the plate thickness T and less than 4 times the plate thickness T (T <P13 <4 × P).

The thirteenth folding straight lines L13 and L13 (the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the right side and the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the left side are in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 19, 22, and 23. In the LR, it is arranged between the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper plate 4 and the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10, respectively.
The 13th folding straight line L13, 13 is arranged between the reference bending straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4) and the 11th folding straight line L11, L11 in the vertical direction UD.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, each of the thirteenth folding straight lines L13, 13 separates the sixth interval P from the reference bending straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4) and the reference bending straight line LX. At each of the second base points QB and QB on the extension lines Lβ of the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 extending between the seventh folding straight line L7 (the lower seventh folding straight line), the second one. It is extended from the base points QB and QB respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the thirteenth folding straight lines L13 and L13 form a second acute angle θ2 on the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10, respectively, from the first base points QB and QB, respectively. It is extended toward the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1 (plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4) and the upper plate upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 (each 7th plate upper edge 4R and 4S). It intersects each plate upper edge 4C, 4D (each seventh plate upper edge 4R, 4S) of the upper plate 4.
As shown in FIG. 22, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side has a second acute angle θ2 on the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side, and the plate upper edge of the base plate body 1 is formed from the second base point QB on the right side. It extends toward 1A (plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4) and plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge 4R), and extends toward the right plate upper edge 4C (7th plate upper edge 4R). ).
As shown in FIG. 22, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side has a second acute angle θ2 on the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side, and the plate upper edge of the base plate body 1 is formed from the second base point QB on the left side. It extends toward 1A (plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4) and plate upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge 4S), and extends toward the left plate upper edge 4D (7th plate upper edge 4S). ).

The 14th folding straight lines L14 and L14 (14th folding straight line L14 on the right side and 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side) are left and right as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 19, 22, and 23. In the direction LR, it is arranged between the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper plate 4 and the ninth bent straight lines L9 and L9.
The 14th folding straight line L14, L14 is arranged between the 13th folding straight line L13, L13 and the reference bending straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4) in the vertical direction LR. ..
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the 14th folding straight lines L14 and L14 are arranged in parallel with the 13th folding straight lines L13 and L13 with a 13th interval P13 (13th distance). As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the 14th and 14th bent straight lines L14 and L14 are the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper plate 4 (the upper edges 4P and 4Q of each 6th plate and the 7th plates respectively). It intersects the upper edges 4R, 4S) and the 9th bending straight lines L9, L9, respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the 14th folding straight lines L14 and L14 form the 10th folding straight lines L10 and L10 with a second acute angle θ2, and form the 13th folding straight lines L13 and L13. Arranged in parallel.
As shown in FIG. 22, the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side is arranged in parallel with the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side with a 13th interval P13. The 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side intersects the plate upper edge 4C (6th plate upper edge 4P and 7th plate upper edge 4R) of the upper plate 4.
As shown in FIG. 23, the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side is arranged in parallel with the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side with a 13th interval P13. The 14th bent straight line L14 on the left side intersects the plate upper edge 4D (6th plate upper edge 4Q and 7th plate upper edge 4S) of the upper plate 4.

The first base points QA and QA on the extension lines La of the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 are the sixth folding straight lines L6 and QA of the lower flat plate 3 as the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the lower flat plate 3. A position where L6 is arranged between the 11th folding straight lines L11 and L11 and the 12th folding straight lines L12 and L12 (between the 13th interval P13) (positions on the extension lines of the 10th folding straight lines L10 and L10). ).
The second base points Q2 and Q2 on the extension lines Lb of the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10 are the fifth folding straight lines L5 of the lower flat plate 3 as the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the lower flat plate 3. Positions where L5 is arranged between the 13th folding straight lines L13 and L13 and the 14th folding straight lines L14 and L14 (between the 13th interval P13) (positions on the extension lines of the 10th folding straight lines L10 and L10). ).

The first upper bent holes 17 and 17 (the first upper bent hole 17 on the right side and the first upper bent hole 17 on the left side) are as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18, 18, 20 and 21. In addition, the portion of the upper 7th folding straight line L7 on the 10th folding straight line L10, L10 side, the portion of the 8th folding straight line L8, L8 on the 7th folding straight line L7 side, each 10th folding straight line. The upper part of the 7th folding line L7 of L10, L10, the part of the 11th folding line L11, L11 on the QA, QA side, and the 12th bending line L12, 12 respectively. It is arranged over the portion on the side of the 8-fold straight line L8 and L8, and opens in the front surface 4X (front plane) and the back surface 4Y (back plane) of the upper plate 4 through the upper plate 4 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction). do.
Each of the first upper folding holes 17 and 17 is a portion of the upper seventh folding straight line L7 on the side of each of the tenth folding straight lines L10 and L10, and the seventh folding straight line L7 of each of the eighth folding straight lines L8 and L8. Side part, upper part of each 10th folding line L10, L10 on the 7th bending line L7 side, each 1st base point QA, QA side part of each 11th folding line L11, L11, and each first The upper flat plate 4 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR at the portion of the 12-folded straight line L12, 12 on the side of each of the 8th folded straight line L8, L8.
As a result, the 7th bending straight line L7, the 8th folding straight line L8, L8, and the 10th folding each, which separates the 6th interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A of the base flat plate 1 (the plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4). The curved straight lines L10 and L10, the eleventh bent straight lines L11 and L11, and the twelfth bent straight lines L12 and L12 are adjacent to (continuously) the first upper bent holes 17 and 17, respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the first upper folding hole 17 on the right side is a portion of the upper seventh folding line L7 on the right side of the 0th folding line L10 and the right side of the eighth folding line L8. The part on the upper side of the 7th folding straight line L7, the part on the upper side of the 10th folding straight line L10 on the right side, and the part on the right side of the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side of the first base point QA. The upper flat plate 4 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR over the portion and the portion on the right side of the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side of the 8th folding straight line L8.
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 21, the first upper folding hole 17 on the left side is a portion of the upper seventh folding line L7 on the left side of the 0th folding line L10, and the left side eighth folding line L8. The part on the upper side of the 7th folding straight line L7, the part on the upper side of the 10th folding straight line L10 on the left side, and the part on the left side of the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side of the 1st base point QA. The upper flat plate 4 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR over the portion of the left side and the portion of the left side of the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side of the 8th folding straight line L8.
As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, each of the first upper bent holes 17 and 17 is, for example, a fan-shaped hole (arc hole) centered on a base point on the upper seventh bent straight line L7, and is left and right. In the direction LR, the upper 7th folding straight line L7, the 8th folding straight line L8, L8, which are formed between the upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper flat plate 4 and the 10th folding straight lines L10 and L10, respectively. Adjacent to (continuously) each 11th folding straight line L11, L11 and each 12th folding straight line L12.

The second upper bent holes 18 and 18 (the second upper bent hole 18 on the right side and the second upper bent hole 18 on the left side) are as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 19, 19, 22 and 23. In addition, the part of the lower 7th folding straight line L7 on the 10th folding straight line L10, L10 side, the part of the 9th folding straight line L8, L8 on the 7th folding straight line L7 side, each 10th folding. The part on the 7th bent straight line L7 side below the straight lines L10 and L10, the part on the second base points QB and QB side of each of the 11th bent straight lines L13 and L13, and the 14th bent straight line L14 and 14 It is arranged over the portions on the side of each of the 9th bent straight lines L9 and L9, and in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction), it penetrates the upper plate 4 and opens to the front surface 4X and the back surface 4Y of the upper plate 4.
Each of the second upper bent holes 18 and 18 is a portion of the lower seventh bent straight line L7 on the side of each tenth bent straight line L10 and L10, and the seventh bent straight line L8 and L8 of the ninth bent straight line L8 and L8. The part on the L7 side, the part on the 7th folding line L7 side below each of the 10th folding straight lines L10 and L10, the part on the second base points QB and QB side of each of the 13th folding straight lines L13 and L13, and the part on the QB side. At the portion of each of the 14th folding straight lines L14 and 14 on the side of the 8th folding straight lines L9 and L9, the upper flat plate 4 is passed through the FR in the front-rear direction.
As a result, the 7th folding straight line L7, the 9th folding straight line L9, L9, each the 10th folding straight line L10, which separates the 6th interval P6 from the reference bending straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4). L10, the 13th folding straight lines L13 and L13, and the 14th folding straight lines L14 and L14 are adjacent to (continuously) the second upper folding holes 18 and 18 respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 22, the second upper folding hole 18 on the right side is a portion of the lower seventh folding straight line L7 on the right side of the 0th folding straight line L10, and the ninth folding straight line on the right side. The lower part of the 7th folding line L7 on the lower side of L9, the part on the L7 side of the 7th folding straight line below the 10th folding line L10 on the right side, and the second part on the right side of the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side. The upper flat plate 4 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR over the portion on the base point QB side and the portion on the right side of the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side and the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the second upper folding hole 18 on the left side is a portion of the lower seventh folding straight line L7 on the left side of the 0th folding straight line L10, and the left 9th folding straight line. The lower part of the 7th folding straight line L7 on the lower side of L9, the part on the 7th folding straight line L7 side below the 10th folding straight line L10 on the left side, and the second part on the left side of the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side. The upper flat plate 4 is penetrated in the front-rear direction FR over the portion on the base point QB side and the portion on the left side of the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side of the 9th folding straight line L9.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the second upper bent holes 18 and 18 are, for example, fan-shaped holes (arc holes) centered on the base point on the lower seventh bent straight line L7. In the left-right direction LR, formed between the upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper flat plate 4 and the 10th bent straight lines L10 and L10, the lower 7th bent straight line L7 and the 9th bent straight lines L9, L9, adjacent (continuous) to each 13th folding straight line L13, L13 and each 14th folding straight line L4, 14.

In the upper flat plate 4, the plate upper edge 4A (plate upper edge 1A of the basic flat plate body 1) is arranged parallel to the upper 7th bent straight line L7 with a 6th interval P6 (6th distance) in the vertical direction UD. Will be done.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 24 to 26, the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 extends in the left-right direction LR and is continuous with the upper plate upper edges 4C and 4D.
As shown in FIG. 24, the plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4 has a plate edge length α1 (same plate edge length) on both sides (right side, left side) of the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR. , It extends between the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper flat plate 4 and the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8, respectively.

In the upper flat plate 4, the plate lower edge 4B, which is the reference bending straight line LX, is the lower seventh in the vertical direction UD, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 19, 24, 26, and 27. It is arranged parallel to the bent straight line L7 with a sixth interval P6 (sixth distance).
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 24, the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4 is continuous with the plate upper edges 4C and 4D in the left-right direction LR.
As shown in FIG. 24, the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4 has a plate edge length α1 (same plate edge length) on both sides (right side, left side) of the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR. , It extends between the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate of the upper flat plate 4 and the ninth bent straight lines L9 and L9, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 24, the upper flat plate 4 has a pair of left and right first plate upper edge portions 4F, 4G, a pair of left and right second plate upper edge portions 4H, 4I, and a pair of left and right third plate upper edge portions 4J, 4K. , Left and right pair of 4th plate upper edge 4L, 4M, left and right pair of 5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O, left and right pair of 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q, and left and right pair of 7th plate upper edge It has 4R and 4S.
As shown in FIG. 24, the upper plate upper edge 4C (upper edge of the right plate) of the upper plate 4 has an upper edge 4F of the first plate on the right side, an upper edge 4H of the second plate on the right side, and an upper edge of the third plate on the right side. It is composed of a portion 4J, an upper edge portion 4L of the 4th plate on the right side, an upper edge portion 4N of the 5th plate on the right side, an upper edge portion 4P of the 6th plate on the right side, and an upper edge portion 4R of the 7th plate on the right side. , Is arranged between the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1) and the plate lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper plate 4.
The plate upper edge 4C is continuous with the right end of the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the right end of the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4 in the left-right direction LR.

As shown in FIG. 24, the upper plate upper edge 4D (upper edge of the left plate) of the upper plate 4 has an upper edge portion 4G of the first plate on the left side, an upper edge portion 4I of the second plate on the left side, and an upper side of the third plate on the left side. It is composed of an edge portion 4K, an upper edge portion 4M of the 4th plate on the left side, an upper edge portion 4O of the 5th plate on the left side, an upper edge portion 4Q of the 6th plate on the left side, and an upper edge portion 4S of the 7th plate on the left side. Is arranged between the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1) and the plate lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper plate 4.
The plate upper edge 4D is continuous with the left end of the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the left end of the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4 in the left-right direction LR.

In the upper plate 4, the upper edges 4C and 4D of each plate are symmetrical with respect to the vertical plate center line CL1 in the left-right direction LR, as shown in FIG. 24.

In each plate upper edge 4C, 4D, each first plate upper edge 4F, 4G (right side first plate upper edge 4F, left side first plate upper edge 4G) is shown in FIGS. 24 to 26. As shown, in the left-right direction LR, it is continuous with each edge end of the plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4.
The upper edge portions 4F and 4G of the first plate are extended from the ninth intersections Q9 and Q9 at the ninth intersections Q9 and Q9 with the plate upper edges 4A of the upper plate 4 respectively. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the upper edge portions 4F and 4G of the first plate have a third acute angle θ3 on the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1). , It extends from each of the 9th intersections Q9 and Q9 to the lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper flat plate 4 while being separated from each of the 10th bent straight lines L4 and L4.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the upper edge 4F of the first plate on the right side has a third acute angle θ3 on the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge 1A of the base plate 1). It extends from the 9th intersection Q9 on the right side toward the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4 while being separated from each 10th bending straight line L4.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the upper edge 4G of the first plate on the left side has a third acute angle θ3 on the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge 1A of the base plate 1). It extends from the 9th intersection Q9 on the left side toward the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4 while being separated from each 10th bending straight line L4.

In each plate upper edge 4C, 4D, each second plate upper edge 4H, 4I (right side second plate upper edge 4H, left side second plate upper edge 4I) is shown in FIGS. 24, 27 and 28. As shown in the above, in the left-right direction LR, it is continuous with each edge end of the plate lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4.
The upper edge portions 4H and 4I of the second plate extend from the tenth intersections Q10 and Q10 at the tenth intersections Q10 and Q10 with the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4. As shown in FIGS. 24, 27 and 28, the upper edge portions 4H and 4I of the second plate are formed with a third acute angle θ3 on the lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper flat plate 4. It extends from the tenth intersections Q10 and Q10 toward the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1) while being separated from the tenth bending straight lines L4 and L4.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 27, the upper edge 4H of the second plate on the right side has a third acute angle θ3 on the lower edge 4B (reference bending straight line LX) of the upper plate 4 and the tenth on the right side. It extends from the intersection Q10 toward the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 (plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1) while being separated from each tenth bending straight line L4.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 28, the upper edge 4I of the second plate on the left side has a third acute angle θ3 on the lower edge 4B (reference bending straight line LX) of the upper plate 4 and the tenth on the left side. It extends from the intersection Q10 toward the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1) while being separated from each tenth bending straight line L4.

In each plate upper edge 4C, 4D, each third plate upper edge 4J, 4K is each edge end (each edge lower end) of each first plate upper edge 4F, 4G, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26. Continue to.
The upper edge portions 4J and 4K of the third plate extend from the upper edge portions 4F and 4G of the first plate toward the lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper plate 4 in the vertical direction UD. .. As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, each third plate upper edge portion 4J, 4K has a plate edge length α3 from each first plate upper edge portion 4F, 4G in the vertical direction UD, and the upper plate 4 It extends to the lower edge 4B side (reference bending straight line LX side) of the plate. The upper edge portions 4J and 4K of the third plate are arranged in parallel with the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10, respectively. The upper edge portions 4J and 4K of the third plate are arranged at the same positions as the lower edge portions 3J and 3K of the third plate of the lower plate 3 in the left-right direction LR.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the upper edge portion 4J of the third plate on the right side has the lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper plate 4 from the upper edge portion 4F of the first plate on the right side in the vertical direction UD. ) Is postponed.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the left side third plate upper edge portion 4K has a plate lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper plate 4 from the left side first plate upper edge portion 4G in the vertical direction UD. ) Is postponed.

In each plate upper edge 4C, 4D, each fourth plate upper edge 4L, 4M is each edge end (each) of each second plate upper edge 4H, 4I, as shown in FIGS. 24, 27 and 28. Continuous to the bottom edge).
The upper edge portions 4L and 4M of the fourth plate are directed from the upper edge portions 4H and 4I of the second plate toward the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (the upper edge 1A of the base plate 1) in the vertical direction UD. It will be postponed. As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, each of the fourth plate upper edge portions 4L and 4M has a plate edge length α3 from the second plate upper edge portions 4H and 4I in the vertical direction UD, and the upper plate 4 It extends to the plate upper edge 4A side (the plate upper edge 1A side of the basic flat plate body 1). The upper edge portions 4L and 4M of the fourth plate are arranged in parallel with the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10, respectively. The upper edge portions 4L and 4M of the fourth plate are arranged at the same positions as the lower edge portions 3L and 3M of the fourth plate of the lower plate 3 in the left-right direction LR.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 27, the upper edge portion 4L of the fourth plate on the right side has the upper edge portion 4A of the upper plate 4 (the base plate body 1) from the upper edge portion 4H of the second plate on the right side in the vertical direction UD. It is extended toward the plate upper edge 1A).
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 28, the left side fourth plate upper edge portion 4M has a plate upper edge 4A (of the base plate body 1) of the upper plate 4 from the left side second plate upper edge portion 4I in the vertical direction UD. It is extended toward the plate upper edge 1A).

In each plate upper edge 4C, 4D, each fifth plate upper edge 4N, 4O is each edge end (each edge upper end) of each third plate upper edge 4J, 4K, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26. Continue to.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the upper edge portions 4N and 4O of the fifth plate are the eleventh intersections Q11 and Q11 at the eleventh intersections Q11 and Q11 with the upper edge portions 4J and 4K of the third plate. It is postponed from each of.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the upper edge portions 4N and 4O of the fifth plate pass through the eleventh intersections Q11 and Q11, and the seventh bent straight lines L7 and L7 (the plate upper edge of the upper plate 4). A fourth acute angle θ4 is formed on the third edge reference straight line Lγ parallel to 4A), and the lower edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) of the upper flat plate 4 and the twelfth of each from each of the eleventh intersections Q11 and Q11. It is extended toward the folding straight lines L12 and L12. As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the upper edge portions 4N and 4O of the fifth plate intersect the twelfth bending straight lines L12 and L12, respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the upper edge portion 4N of the fifth plate on the right side has a fourth acute angle θ4 on the third edge reference straight line Lγ, and the plate bottom of the upper plate 4 is formed from the eleventh intersection Q11 on the right side. It extends toward the edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) and the 12th bent straight line L12 on the right side, and intersects the 12th bent straight line L12 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the upper edge portion 4O of the fifth plate on the left side has a fourth acute angle θ4 on the third edge reference straight line Lγ, and the plate bottom of the upper plate 4 is formed from the eleventh intersection Q11 on the left side. It extends toward the edge 4B (reference bent straight line LX) and the 12th bent straight line L12 on the left side, and intersects the 12th bent straight line L12 on the left side.

In each plate upper edge 4C, 4D, each sixth plate upper edge 4P, 4Q is each edge end (each) of each fourth plate upper edge 4L, 4M, as shown in FIGS. 24, 27 and 28. Continuous to the top of the edge).
As shown in FIGS. 24, 27 and 28, the upper edge portions 4P and 4Q of the sixth plate are the twelfth intersections at the twelfth intersections Q12 and Q12 with the upper edge portions 4L and 4M of the fourth plate. It is postponed from Q12 and Q12 respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 24, 27 and 28, the upper edge portions 4P and 4Q of the sixth plate pass through the twelfth intersections Q12 and Q21 and are parallel to the seventh bending straight line L7 and L7. A fourth acute angle θ4 is formed on the edge reference straight line Lε, and the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 (plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1) and the 14th bent straight line L14, respectively, are formed from the 12th intersections Q12 and Q12. It will be postponed toward L14. The upper edge portions 4P and 4Q of the sixth plate intersect with the 14th bending straight lines L14 and L14, respectively.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 27, the upper edge portion 4P of the sixth plate on the right side forms a fourth acute angle θ4 on the fourth edge reference straight line Lε, and is on the plate of the upper plate 4 from the 12th intersection Q12 on the right side. It extends toward the edge 4A (the upper edge 1A of the basic flat plate 1) and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side, and intersects the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 28, the upper edge portion 4Q of the sixth plate on the left side forms a fourth acute angle θ4 on the fourth edge reference straight line Lε, and is on the plate of the upper plate 4 from the 12th intersection Q12 on the left side. It extends toward the edge 4A (the upper edge 1A of the base flat plate 1) and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side, and intersects the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side.

In each plate upper edge 4C, 4D, each 7th plate upper edge 4R, 4S is each edge end (each edge lower end) of each 5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 28. , And each edge edge (upper end of each edge) of each of the upper edge portions 4P and 4Q of the sixth plate.
As shown in FIGS. 24 to 28, the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the 7th plate are the 13th intersections Q13 and Q13 of the upper edge portions 4N and 4O of the 5th plate and the 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12, respectively. Between the 13th intersections Q13 and Q13 and the 14th intersections Q14 and Q14 at the 14th intersections Q14 and Q14 of the upper edges 4P and 4Q of the 6th plate and the 14th bending straight lines L14 and L14. Be placed.
As shown in FIG. 24, the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the 7th plate are arranged in parallel with the 10th bending straight lines L10 and L10 at intervals P9 (9th distance) in the left-right direction LR. ..
The upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the seventh plate are the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10 and the upper edge portions 4J and 4K of the third plate (each upper edge portion 4L and 4M of the fourth plate) in the left-right direction LR. Placed in between. The upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the 7th plate are the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate of the lower plate 3 and the 10th bent straight lines L10 and L10 (each 4th bent straight line L4) in the left-right direction LR. , L4), and is located on the vertical plate center line CL1 side from the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower plate 3.
The upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the 7th plate extend between the 13th intersection Q13 and Q13 and the 14th intersection Q14 and Q14 in the vertical direction UD.
As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the 7th plate are the upper edge portions 4N and 4O of the 5th plate and the 12th bent straight line L12, respectively, at the 13th intersections Q13 and Q13. Cross L12. As shown in FIGS. 24, 27 and 28, the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the 7th plate are the upper edge portions 4P and 4Q of the 6th plate and the 14th bends at the 14th intersections Q14 and Q14. It intersects the straight lines L14 and L14.
The upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the 7th plate are the 11th folding straight lines L11 and L11 and the 13th folding straight lines L13 and L13 between the 13th intersections Q13 and Q13 and the 14th intersections Q14 and Q14. Cross to.
As shown in FIG. 25, the upper edge 4R of the 7th plate on the right side extends between the 13th intersection Q13 on the right side and the 14th intersection Q14 on the right side, and at the 13th intersection Q13 on the right side, the 5th on the right side. It intersects the upper edge of the plate 4N and the 12th bending straight line L12 on the right side. The upper edge portion 4R of the 7th plate on the right side intersects the upper edge portion 4P of the 6th plate on the right side and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side at the 14th intersection Q14 on the right side. As shown in FIGS. 24, 25 and 27, the upper edge portion 4R of the 7th plate on the right side has the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side between the 13th intersection Q13 on the right side and the 14th intersection Q14 on the right side. It intersects the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side.
As shown in FIG. 24, the upper edge portion 4R of the 7th plate on the right side is arranged in parallel with the 10th bending straight line L10 on the right side with a 9th interval P9 (9th distance) in the left-right direction LR.
As a result, the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side is separated from the 7th plate upper edge portion 4R of the plate upper edge 4C (right side plate upper edge) by the 9th interval P9 (9th distance) in the left-right direction LR. Arranged in parallel.
As shown in FIG. 26, the upper edge portion 4S of the 7th plate on the left side extends between the 13th intersection Q13 on the left side and the 14th intersection Q14 on the left side, and at the 13th intersection Q13 on the left side, the 5th on the left side. It intersects the upper edge 4O of the plate and the 12th bending straight line L12 on the left side. The left side 7th plate upper edge portion 4S intersects the left side 6th plate upper edge portion 4Q and the left side 14th folding straight line L14 at the 14th intersection Q14 on the left side. As shown in FIGS. 24, 26 and 28, the upper edge portion 4S of the 7th plate on the left side has the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side and the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side between the 13th intersection Q13 on the left side and the 14th intersection Q14 on the left side. It intersects the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side.
As shown in FIG. 24, the upper edge portion 4S of the 7th plate on the left side is arranged in parallel with the 10th bending straight line L10 on the left side with a 9th interval P9 (9th interval P9) in parallel in the left-right direction LR.
As a result, the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side is separated from the 7th plate upper edge portion 4S of the plate upper edge 4D (left side plate upper edge) by the 9th interval P9 (9th interval) in the left-right direction LR. Arranged in parallel.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIGS. 18 and 19, the upper flat plate 4 includes a holding flat plate portion 19, a holding window hole 20, a first upper leg flat plate portion 21, a second upper leg flat plate portion 22, and a pair of left and right upper flat plates. It is composed of upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24, a pair of left and right third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26, and a pair of left and right fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28.

In the upper flat plate 4, the presser plate portion 19 is partitioned by the 7th bent straight lines L7 and L7 and the 10th bent straight lines L10 and L10, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3. The presser plate portion 19 is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction LR.

The presser window hole 20 is formed in the presser plate portion 19 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, 6, 18 and 19. The presser window hole 20 penetrates the presser plate portion 19 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) and is opened on the front surface 19X (front plane) and the back surface 19Y (back plane) of the presser plate portion 19.
As shown in FIGS. 4, 6, 18 and 19, the presser window hole 20 includes a window hole upper edge 20A (presser window hole upper edge), a window hole lower edge 20B (presser window hole lower edge), and a window hole. It has a presser window hole edge consisting of a right edge 20C (presser window hole right edge) and a window hole left edge 20D (presser window hole left edge), and is formed in a rectangular window hole.

As shown in FIG. 18, the window hole upper edge 20A of the presser window hole 20 has a seventh bent straight line L7 on the upper side (the seventh interval P6 is separated from the plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) in the vertical direction UD. It is arranged in parallel with the first window hole spacing Pa apart from the bent straight line). The window hole upper edge 20A extends in the left-right direction LR and is orthogonal to the window hole right edge 20C and the window hole left edge 20D.

As shown in FIG. 19, the lower edge 20B of the window hole of the presser window hole 20 is the lower seventh bent straight line L7 (the sixth interval P6 is separated from the lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4) in the vertical direction UD. 7 Bent straight line L7) is arranged in parallel with a first window hole spacing P. The lower edge 20B of the window hole extends in the left-right direction LR and is orthogonal to the right edge 20C of the window hole and the left edge 20D of the window hole.
In the presser window hole 20, the window hole upper edge 20A and the window hole lower edge 20B are arranged in parallel with each other with a second window hole spacing Pb in the vertical direction UD.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the window hole right edge 20C of the presser window hole 20 has a 9th interval P9 on the plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 on the right side 10th bending straight line L10 in the left-right direction LR. It is arranged in parallel with a third window hole spacing Pc on the tenth bending straight line that separates it. The window hole right edge 20C extends in the vertical direction UD and is orthogonal to the window hole upper edge 20A and the window hole lower edge 20B.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the window hole left edge 20D of the presser window hole 20 has a 9th interval P9 on the plate upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 on the left side 10th bending straight line L10 in the left-right direction LR. It is arranged in parallel with a third window hole spacing Pc on the tenth bending straight line that separates it. The window hole left edge 20D extends in the vertical direction UD and is orthogonal to the window hole upper edge 20A and the window hole lower edge 20B.
In the presser window hole 20, the window hole right edge 20C and the window hole left edge 20D are arranged in parallel with each other with a fourth window hole spacing Pc in the left-right direction LR.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is on the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (plate upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) and on the plate of the foundation flat plate body 1. The edge 1A (upper edge 4A of the upper flat plate 4) is partitioned by a 7th bent straight line L7 (upper 7th bent straight line) separating the 6th interval P6, and 8th bent straight lines L8 and L8, respectively. .. The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction LR.
The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is connected to the upper seventh bent straight line L7 and the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8, respectively.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is adjacent to the pressing flat plate portion 19 along the upper seventh bent straight line L7 in the vertical direction UD. It is installed) and arranged on the upper side of the presser plate portion 19.

In the upper flat plate 4, the upper seventh bent straight line L7 serves as a boundary (boundary line) between the holding flat plate portion 19 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has a reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4) and a lower seventh bent straight line L7 (upper flat plate). The 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval P6 from the lower edge 4B of the plate 4), and the 9th folding straight lines L9 and L9, respectively. The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has the same shape as the first upper leg flat plate portion 21, and is formed in a long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in the left-right direction LR.
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is connected to the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4), the lower seventh bent straight line L7, and the ninth bent straight lines L9 and l9, respectively.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is adjacent to the pressing flat plate portion 19 along the lower seventh bending straight line L7 in the vertical direction UD (as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19). (Continuously installed) and arranged under the pressed flat plate portion 19.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 9, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is adjacent to the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 of the lower flat plate 3 along the reference bending straight line LX in the vertical direction UD. (Continuously installed) and arranged on the upper side of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9.

In the upper flat plate 4, the lower seventh bent straight line L7 serves as a boundary (boundary line) between the holding flat plate portion 19 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 9. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, FIGS. 18 and 19, each of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 (upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side and upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side) is folded at the tenth position. Curved straight lines L10, L10, eleventh bent straight lines L11, L11, thirteenth bent straight lines L13, L13, and upper plate upper edges 4C, 4D of the upper plate 4 (each seventh plate upper edge 4R, 4S). It is partitioned by.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 (right side) has a 10th folding straight line L10 on the right side, an 11th folding straight line L10 on the right side, and a 13th folding line on the right side. It is partitioned by a curved straight line L13 and a plate upper edge 4C (7th plate upper edge 4R) of the upper plate 4.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19, the upper rising flat plate portion 24 (left side) has a 10th folding straight line L10 on the left side, an 11th folding straight line L10 on the left side, and a 13th folding line on the left side. It is partitioned by a curved straight line L13 and a plate upper edge 4D (7th plate upper edge 4S) of the upper plate 4.
The upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 are connected to each of the tenth bent straight lines L10 and L10, the eleventh bent straight lines L11 and L11, and the thirteenth bent straight lines L13 and L13.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 (right side) is pressed along the 10th bending straight line L10 on the right side in the left-right direction LR. Adjacent to (continuously) and arranged on the right side of the presser plate portion 19.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19, the upper rising flat plate portion 24 (left side) is adjacent to the pressing flat plate portion 19 along the 10th bending straight line L10 on the left side in the left-right direction LR (as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19). (Continuously installed) and arranged on the left side of the presser plate portion 19.

In the upper flat plate 4, each of the tenth bending straight lines L10 and L10 is a boundary line (boundary line) between the holding flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19. ).

The third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 (the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side) are as shown in FIGS. In addition, each plate upper edge 4C, 4D of the upper plate 4 (each first plate upper edge 4F, 4G, each third plate upper edge 4J, 4K, each sixth plate upper edge 4P, 4Q and each seventh Plate upper edge 4R, 4S), plate upper edge 4A of upper plate 4 (plate upper edge 1A of foundation plate 1), 8th bent straight lines L8, L8, and 11th bent straight lines L11, L11, respectively. It is partitioned by.
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 (right side) has a plate upper edge 4C of the upper plate 4 (first plate upper edge portion 4F, third plate upper edge portion 4J, fifth plate). Upper edge 4N and 7th plate upper edge 4R), plate upper edge 4A of upper plate 4 (plate upper edge 1A of foundation plate 1), 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side, and 11th folding on the right side. It is partitioned by a straight line L11.
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 21, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 (left side) has a plate upper edge 4D (first plate upper edge portion 4G, third plate upper edge portion 4K, fifth plate) of the upper plate 4. Upper edge 4O and 7th plate upper edge 4S), plate upper edge 4A of upper plate 4 (plate upper edge 1A of foundation plate 1), 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side, and 11th folding on the left side. It is partitioned by a straight line L11.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is connected to the eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is attached to the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 along the right eighth bending straight line L8 in the left-right direction LR. Adjacent (continuously), it is arranged on the right side of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is connected to the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the right side. As a result, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is adjacent (continuously) to the upper rising flat plate portion 23 (right side) along the 11th bending straight line L11 on the right side in the vertical direction UD, and the upper rising flat plate portion 25 is provided. It is arranged on the upper side of the portion 23.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 (left side) is connected to the eighth bent straight line L8 on the left side. As a result, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is adjacent (continuously) to the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 along the eighth bent straight line L8 on the left side, and is arranged on the left side of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21. Will be done.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 (left side) is connected to the 11th bent straight line L11 on the left side. As a result, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is adjacent (continuously) to the upper rising flat plate portion 24 (left side) along the 11th bending straight line L11 on the left side in the vertical direction UD, and the upper rising flat plate portion 26 is provided. It is arranged on the upper side of the portion 24.

In the upper flat plate 4, each of the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8 is a boundary between the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18. (Boundary line).
In the upper flat plate 4, the eleventh bent straight lines L11 and L11 are the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 16 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 18. It becomes the boundary (boundary line) of.

The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 (the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side) are as shown in FIGS. In addition, each reference cut straight line LY, LY (plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4), each plate upper edge 4C, 4D of the upper plate 4 (each second plate upper edge 4H, 4I, each fourth plate upper edge). 4L, 4M, each 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q and each 7th plate upper edge 4R, 4S), each 9th folding straight line L9, L9, and each 13th folding straight line L13, L13. It is partitioned.
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 27, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 (right side) has a reference cut straight line LY (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4) and the upper plate upper edge 4C (the first) of the upper flat plate 4 on the right side. 2 plate upper edge 4H, each 4th plate upper edge 4L, 6th plate upper edge 4P and 7th plate upper edge 4R), 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side, and 13th bent straight line on the right side. It is partitioned by L13.
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 28, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 (left side) has a reference cut straight line LY on the left side (the lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4) and the upper edge 4D of the upper plate 4 (the fourth plate upper edge 4D). 2 plate upper edge 4I, 4th plate upper edge 4M, 6th plate upper edge 4Q and 7th plate upper edge 4S), 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side, and 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side. It is partitioned by.
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 (right side) is connected to the ninth bent straight line L9 on the right side. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19, the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is attached to the 2nd upper leg flat plate portion 22 along the 9th bending straight line L9 on the right side in the left-right direction LR. Adjacent (continuously), it is arranged on the right side of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22.
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is continuously provided in the reference cut straight line LY on the right side. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the first shape-retaining flat plate of the lower plate 3 along the reference cut straight line LY on the right side in the vertical direction UD. Adjacent to (continuously) the portion 13, it is arranged on the upper side of the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13.
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is connected to the thirteenth bent straight line L13 on the right side. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 has an upper rising flat plate portion 23 (right side) along the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side in the vertical direction UD. ) Adjacent to (continuously) and arranged on the lower side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 (left side) is connected to the ninth bent straight line L9 on the left side. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19, the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is attached to the 2nd upper leg flat plate portion 22 along the 9th bending straight line L9 on the left side in the left-right direction LR. Adjacent (continuously), it is arranged on the left side of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22.
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is continuously provided in the reference cut straight line LY on the left side. As a result, the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is adjacent to (continuously installed) the 1st shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 of the lower plate 3 along the reference cut straight line LY on the left side in the vertical direction UD, and the 1st retention plate portion 27 is connected. It is arranged on the upper side of the flat plate portion 14.
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is connected to the thirteenth bent straight line L13 on the left side. As a result, the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is adjacent (continuously) to the upper rising flat plate portion 24 (left side) along the 13th bending straight line L13 on the left side in the vertical direction UD, and the upper rising flat plate portion 27 is provided. It is arranged under the portion 24.

In the upper flat plate 4, each of the ninth bent straight lines L9 and L9 is a boundary between the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19. (Boundary line).
In the upper flat plate 4, the 13th bent straight lines L13 and L14 are the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 19. It becomes the boundary (boundary line) of.

<Presser sheet 2>
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 8, 18 and 19, the presser sheet 2 (pressing film) is laminated (loaded) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 and the surface 4X of the upper flat plate 4.
The presser sheet 2 has a first presser sheet portion 2A and a second presser sheet portion 2B. The first and second presser sheet portions 2A and 2B are formed in a rectangular shape, for example.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 7 and 8, the first presser sheet portion 2A is laminated on the surface 7X (front flat plate) of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The first presser sheet portion 2A covers the loading window hole 8 (all openings of the loading window hole 8) and is laminated on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3). The first presser sheet portion 2A is arranged so as to cover the loading window hole 8 in a stretched state without slack.
The first presser sheet portion 2A is the entire window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is the lower flat plate 3 along the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. It is fixed (attached) to the surface 3X (front plane) of.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, 18 and 19, the second presser sheet portion 2B is laminated on the surface 19X (front plane) of the presser plate portion 19.
The second presser sheet portion 2B covers the presser window hole 20 (the entire opening of the presser window hole 20) and is laminated on the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 (the surface 4X of the upper flat plate 4). The second presser sheet portion 2B is arranged so as to cover the presser window hole 20 in a stretched state without slack.
The second presser sheet portion 2B is the entire window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, and is the upper flat plate 4 along the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window hole left edge 20D. It is fixed (attached) to the surface 4X (front plane) of.

The presser sheet 2 (first and second presser sheet portions 2A and 2B) is formed of a sheet material (film material) having elasticity (flexibility). For the presser sheet 2, for example, a transparent film made of a polyurethane-based thermoplastic resin as a raw material is used (the film thickness is 10 to 300 μm).
In the first and second presser sheet portions 2A and 2B, for example, when a transparent film made of a polyurethane-based thermoplastic resin is used, the surface 3X of the lower plate 3 and the surface of the upper plate 4 are subjected to heat sealing (thermocompression bonding). Can be fixed (fixed) to 4X.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the presser sheet 2 comprises a first presser sheet portion 2A and a second presser sheet portion 2B by one sheet (film), and the lower flat plate 3 and the upper flat plate 3 are formed. It is arranged on the surface 1A of the base plate 1 over 4 and fixed to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3 and the surface 4X of the upper plate 4. In the presser sheet 2, the first presser sheet portion 2A and the second presser sheet portion 2B are composed of two sheets (films), and the first presser sheet portion 2A made of one sheet (film) is lowered. A configuration in which the second pressing sheet portion 2B made of one sheet (film) is fixed to the surface 3X of the flat plate 3 and fixed to the surface 4X of the upper flat plate 4 can also be adopted (hereinafter, the same applies to the second and third embodiments). ).

The presser sheet 2 has an article (commodity) arranged between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. The (product) is sandwiched and fixed by the first and second presser sheet portions 2A and 2B (see FIG. 37).

<Packing of goods (goods)>
Next, a procedure (assembly and packing method) for assembling the packing cushioning material X1 and packing the article Z (commodity) will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 37.

First, in the developed packing cushioning material X1, the article Z (commodity) is loaded (placed) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 (see FIG. 29).
As shown in FIG. 29, the article Z is arranged in the loading window hole 8 (inside the loading window hole 8) from the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3, and is arranged in the first pressing sheet portion 2A (the first pressing sheet portion 2A). It is loaded (placed) on the surface).
At this time, the article Z is the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is loaded without contacting the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. It is loaded (placed) on the first presser sheet portion 2A inside the window hole 8 (on the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A).

In FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 along the reference bending straight line LX. The upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 along the reference bending straight line LX with the surface 4X directed toward the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is folded with the surface 22X of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 toward the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is folded back to the surface 9X (front plane) of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 along the curved straight line LX.
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces 27X and 28X of the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 as the surfaces of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14. It is folded back toward the surfaces 13X and 14X (front plane) of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 along the reference cut straight line LY and LY (reference bending straight line LX) toward 13X and 14X.
As a result, the upper flat plate 4 is arranged so as to overlap the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 with the reference bending straight line LX as a boundary (boundary line).
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is arranged so as to overlap the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 with the reference bending straight line LX as a boundary (boundary line).
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces 13X and 14X of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 with the reference cut straight line LY and LY (reference bent straight line LY) as a boundary (boundary line). It is placed on top of the table surface).

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the presser plate portion 19 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the presser window hole 20 is arranged so as to overlap the loading window hole 8 in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has the surface 21X of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 on the second lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 10X (front plane) of the second lower leg plate portion 10 toward the surface 10X of the leg plate portion 10.
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, each of the upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24 has the surface 23X of each upper rising flat plate portion 23, 24 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 24X is arranged so as to face the surfaces 11X and 12X of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12 and to overlap the surfaces 11X and 12X (front plane) of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12.
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, each of the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 has a surface of each of the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 25X and 26X are arranged so as to face the surfaces 15X and 16X of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 on the surfaces 15X and 16X (front plane) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 respectively.
As shown in FIG. 30, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 11th bent straight lines L11 and L11 and the 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12 (each 13th interval) in a state of being overlapped on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged on P13).
As shown in FIG. 30, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 13th bent straight lines L13 and L13 and the 14th bent straight lines L14 and L14 (each 13th interval) in a state of being overlapped on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. On P13), the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged.

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second presser sheet portion 2B has the surface of the second presser sheet portion 2B first in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A toward the surface of the presser sheet portion 2A.
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second presser sheet portion 2B covers the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3. , Abuts on article Z.
At this time, the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A is the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window. It comes into contact with the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20 (inside the presser window hole 20) without touching the left edge 20D of the hole.
As a result, the presser sheet 2 puts the article Z (commodity) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. Deploy.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 30 to 37, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 which are overlapped with each other are subjected to the upper first bending straight line L1 and the upper seventh folding. Bend along the straight line L7 to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19 (the back surface side of the first presser sheet portion 2A).
At this time, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is the first bent straight line L1 (the upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3). It is bent toward the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the above.
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is along the seventh bent straight line L7 (the lower seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4). , The presser plate portion 19 is bent toward the surface 19X side.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 37, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate portion is along the upper first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the 7Y side of the back surface of 7. The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the back surface side of the first pressing sheet portion 2A) with the upper first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 37, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the lower seventh bending straight line L7. It can be lowered to the 19X side. As shown in FIGS. 34 and 37, the raised second upper flat plate portion 22 abuts on the surface 9X of the raised first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and abuts on the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is overlaid on 9X. The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is overlapped with the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 that is erected with the lower seventh bent straight line L7 as a boundary (boundary line), and the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed. It is lowered to the surface 19X side of.
In this way, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 arranged so as to be stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 37, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 which are overlapped with each other are arranged with the lower first bent straight line L1 and the lower seventh bent straight line. It is bent along L7 to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is the first bent straight line L1 (lower first) that separates the first interval P1 from the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). It is bent to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 along one bent straight line).
The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is a seventh bent straight line L7 (upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 1A of the upper flat plate 4). It is bent to the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 along the above.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 37, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and is loaded along the lower first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the lower first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 37, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the upper seventh bent straight line L7. It can be lowered to the side. As shown in FIGS. 34 and 37, the raised first upper leg flat plate portion 21 abuts on the surface 10X of the raised second lower leg flat plate portion 10 of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10. It is layered on the surface 10X. The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is overlapped with the lowered second lower leg flat plate portion 10 with the upper seventh bent straight line L10 as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the surface 19X side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to.
In this way, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 that are stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 34, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, along the 4th folding straight line L4 on the right side and the 10th folding straight line L10 on the right side, the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the surface side of the 1st pressing sheet portion 2A) and the pressing flat plate portion 19 It is raised on the back surface 19Y side (the back surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B).
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are lowered. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3C (the lower edge portion 3R of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is the plate upper edge 4C (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the upper edge portion 4R of the plate.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 33, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 33, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the right side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 abuts on the surface 11X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a lower rising flat plate portion 23. It is superimposed on the surface 11X of the portion 11. The upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the back Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the lower right side rising flat plate portion 11 and the right side upper rising flat plate portion 23 are loaded with the lowering of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.
In addition, "with the lowering of each lower leg flat plate portion 9, 10 and each upper leg flat plate portion 21 and 22" means "each lower leg flat plate portion 9, 10 and each upper leg flat plate portion 21," In conjunction with the start-up of 22, it can be said that "(the same applies hereinafter).

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 34, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the lower side rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are raised. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3D (the lower edge portion 3S of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 has a plate upper edge 4D (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the plate upper edge portion 4S).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 33, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 33, the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the left side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane). It is superposed on the surface 12X of the portion 12. The upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the left lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 are loaded as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the right side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the right side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3J of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the right side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th on the right side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (4L upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the right side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a standing flat plate portion 11 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the left side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the left side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the left side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3K of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the left side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th on the left side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4M upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the left side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 and a standing flat plate portion 12 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the right side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. A third bent straight line L3 (third bent straight line L3 on the right side) and a sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3L of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the 12th on the right side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (the upper edge 4J of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is a second support plate portion that has been raised and folded back and a lower side-raising flat plate portion 11 that has been raised between the raised flat plate portion 23 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 that has been raised. The shaped flat plate portion 15 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the left side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The third bent straight line L3 (the third bent straight line L3 on the left side) and the sixth bent straight line L3 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3M of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (8th folding straight line L8 on the left side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th on the left side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4K on the upper edge of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised and folded second retaining flat plate portion 12. The shaped flat plate portion 16 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and is folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the second presser sheet portion 2B is the article Z as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against (lower plate 3).
As a result, the presser sheet 2 sandwiches the article Z (product) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. And fix the article Z.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 have the surface 7X and the presser of the loading flat plate portion 7 from the rising angle θB. It is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19.
At this time, each of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and each of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 has each second bent straight line L2 and L2 and each third as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37. Along the bent straight lines L3, L3, the fifth bent straight lines L5, L5, and the sixth bent straight lines L6, L6, at positions parallel to the back surfaces 11Y, 12Y of the lower rising flat plate portions 11, 12. It is folded back and raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8 and the ninth folded straight lines, respectively. Along the curved straight lines L9, L9, the 11th bent straight lines L11, L11, the 12th bent straight lines L12, L12, the 13th bent straight lines L13, L13, and the 14th bent straight lines L14, L14, respectively. It is folded back at a position parallel to the back surfaces 23Y and 24Y of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24, and is raised at a position perpendicular to the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19.
As a result, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the first holding flat plate portion 13, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 27 are in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. , Are stacked in parallel with each other. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P3). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the lower rising flat plate portion 12, the first holding flat plate portion 14, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 28 are mutually in the left-right direction LR, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 are the upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the second holding flat plate portion 15, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the third holding flat plate portion 25 are mutually in the left-right direction LR, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 11th and 12th bent straight lines L11 and L11 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 25.
The lower rising flat plate portion 12, the second holding flat plate portion 16, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the third holding flat plate portion 26 are parallel to each other in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36.・ The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 are arranged in an overlapping manner. It is folded between 24 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26.

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate of the lower rising plate portions 11 and 12) are respectively. When the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are raised at positions orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, they are arranged in parallel with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The 7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper rising plate portions 23, 24) hold down the upper rising plate portions 23, 24, and the flat plate portion 19 When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19, it is arranged in parallel with the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19.

5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O of each lower plate 3, and 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q (5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O of each 1st shape-retaining flat plate 13, 14). As shown in FIG. 35, the sixth plate lower edge portions 3P, 3Q) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 are loaded with the first and second shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 to 16 and the flat plate portions 7. When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the above, it is arranged in parallel with the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of each of the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12.
By setting the fourth acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the first acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the lower edge portion of the fifth plate of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 3N, 3O, the lower edge portions 3P, 3Q of the sixth plate of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15, 16 are parallel to the lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. Be placed. The fourth acute angle θ4 is, for example, an angle [θ4 = (1/2) × θ1] that is half of the first acute angle θ1 (hereinafter, the same applies).
Upper plate upper edge 4N, 4Q of each 5th plate and 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q of the upper plate 4 (5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O of each 3rd shape-retaining flat plate 25, 26, each 4th As shown in FIG. 35, the sixth plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q) of the shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 hold the third and fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 to 28 on the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19. When they are raised at orthogonal positions, they are arranged in parallel with the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the seventh plate of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24.
By setting the 4th acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the 1st acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the upper edge 4N of the 5th plate of the 3rd shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 , 4O, the 6th plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q of each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are arranged in parallel with the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. To.
As a result, the packing cushioning material X1 is assembled by packing the article Z (commodity).

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the packing cushioning material X1 (hereinafter referred to as “assembled and packed packing cushioning material X1”) assembled by packing the article Z (commodity) is transported (transported). It is stored in the rectangular packing box B.
As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X1 is housed in the packing box B from the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7.
As shown in FIG. 40, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X1 includes the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 (on the plate of the lower flat plate 3). The edge 3A and the lower edge 3B of the plate, the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the lower edge 4B of the plate) are in contact with the bottom plate 101 of the packing box B. It is stored in the packing box B.
Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the packing cushioning material X1 assembled and packed includes the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in the side flat plate 52 of the packing box B. It abuts on 52 and is stored in the packing box B.
Subsequently, the lid flat plate 53 of the packing box B is closed, and the lid flat plate 53 is brought into contact with the raised lower raising plate portions 11 and 12 and the raised upper rising flat plates 23 and 24. And carry it.
At this time, the packed cushioning material X1 that has been assembled and packed abuts the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 on the side flat plates 52, 52 of the packing box B. , The assembly of the packing cushioning material X1 is not opened (deployed), the falling angles θA of the first and second lower leg plate portions 9 and 10, and the standing of the first and second upper leg plate portions 21 and 22. The lowering angle θA is maintained.

In the lower plate 3 of the packing cushioning material X1, the vertical angle θA, the first acute angle θ1, the plate width H7 of the loading plate portion 7, and the plate widths H9, H10 of the first and second lower leg plate portions 9, 10. The relationship between the above will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 7 to 12, and 41.

First, as shown in FIG. 2, the plate width H7 of the loading flat plate portion 7 is a distance between the first bending straight lines L1 and L1 in the vertical direction UD, and is the second interval P2 (second distance). Will be.
As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the plate widths H9 and H10 of the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are the reference bent straight line LX and the upper first bent straight line L1 in the vertical direction. The distance between them, or the distance between the lower edge 1B of the base plate 1 (the lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3) and the lower first bending straight line L1, and the first interval P1 (first distance). ).
As shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the first acute angle θ1 is between the fifth bent straight line L5 and the fourth bent straight line L4 (or between the sixth bent straight line L6 and the fourth bent straight line L4). ).
As shown in FIG. 41, the fall angle θA is an angle between the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 7Y. The rise angle θA is greater than θA = 0 degrees (0 °) and less than θA = 180 degrees (180 °) (0 ° <θA <180 °), for example θA = 30 degrees (30 °). It is set to an arbitrary angle in the range of ~ θA = 90 degrees (90 °).
As shown in FIG. 41, the bending angle θC is an angle formed with the fifth folding straight line L5 (or the sixth folding straight line L6), and the first acute angle θ1 is set from an angle of 90 degrees (90 °). It is the subtracted angle, and θC = 90 degrees (90 °) −θ1. The bending angle θC is an angle [θC = (1/2) × θA] that is half of the falling angle θA.
As shown in FIG. 41, the rising bottom distance R is orthogonal to the back surface Y7 of the loading flat plate portion 7, and is the lower plate edge 3B (or the first lower leg) of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 that is raised. It is the distance between the plate upper edge 3A) of the flat plate portion 9 and the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7.

The plate widths H9 and H10 of the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 have the same plate width HA (HA = H9 = H10), and the plate width HC [1/n of the plate width H7 of the loading flat plate portion 7]. HC = (1 / n) × H7: However, n is not zero], and the falling bottom distance R is as follows.
The plate thickness HC is, for example, in the range of HC = (1/4) × H7 to (1/2) × H7, preferably HC = (1/2) × H7.
The equation (or the plate width HA of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10), the plate width HC, and the plate width HA of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the falling bottom distance R 1) and equation (2) hold.

In the formulas (1) and (2), when the falling bottom distance R and the plate width H7 (HC) of the loading flat plate portion 7 are set to arbitrary values, the falling angle θA and the first and second lower legs are set. The plate width HA (H9, H10) of the flat plate portions 9 and 10 can be set.
Then, once the falling angle θA is determined, the first acute angle θ1 and the bending angle θC can also be determined.
The first and second lower legs of the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are provided in the range where the falling angle θA = 0 degrees (0 °) and less than θA = 90 degrees (90 °). As the flat plate portions 9 and 10 are raised, they are raised at a rising angle θB corresponding to the falling angle θA. If the rising angle θA = 0 degrees (0 °), the bending angle θB = 180 degrees (180 °), and the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12 are the first and second lower leg flat plates. As the back surface 7Y side of the loading plate portions 7 is lowered, the loading plate portions 7 do not rise to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The plate widths H9 and H10 (first interval P1) of the falling angle θA, the rising angle θB, the first acute angle θ1, the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10, are the plate widths of the loading flat plate portion 7. It depends on H7 (second interval P2), and if the plate width H7 and the vertical bottom distance R of the loading flat plate portion 7 are set to arbitrary values, it can be determined by the equations (1) and (2).

In the upper plate 4 of the packing cushioning material X1, the vertical angle θA, the second acute angle θ2, the plate width H19 of the presser plate portion 19, and the plate widths H21, 22 of the first and second upper leg plate portions 21 and 22 The relationship will be described with reference to FIGS. 2, 18 to 23, and 41.

First, as shown in FIG. 2, the plate width H19 of the presser plate portion 19 is a distance between the seventh bending straight lines L7 and L7 in the vertical direction UD, and is the seventh interval P7 (seventh distance). Will be.
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the plate widths H21 and 22 of the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are the plate upper edge 1A of the base plate body 1 (the plate of the upper flat plate 4) in the vertical direction UD. The distance between the upper edge 4A) and the upper 7th bending line L, or the distance between the reference bending line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4) and the lower 7th bending line L7. Then, it becomes the sixth interval P6 (sixth distance).
As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the second acute angle θ2 is between the 11th bent straight line L11 and the 12th bent straight line L12 (or the thirteenth bent straight line L13 and the 14th bent straight line L14. ), For example, the first acute angle θ1 is the same angle.
As shown in FIG. 41, the rise angle θA is an angle between the pressing plate portion 19 and the surface 19X. The rise angle θA is greater than θA = 0 degrees (0 °) and less than θA = 180 degrees (180 °) (0 ° <θA <180 °), for example θA = 30 degrees (30 °). It is set to an arbitrary angle in the range of ~ θA = 90 degrees (90 °).
As shown in FIG. 41, the bending angle θD is an angle formed with the 11th bending straight line L11 (or the 13th bending straight line L13), and the angle: 90 degrees (90 °) to the second acute angle θ2. It is the subtracted angle, and θD = 90 degrees (90 °) −θ2. The bending angle θD is an angle [θD = (1/2) × θA] that is half of the falling angle θA.
As shown in FIG. 41, the rising bottom distance R is orthogonal to the surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion, and the lower edge 4B (or the first upper leg flat plate portion 21) of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 that is raised is perpendicular to the surface 19X. It is the distance between the plate upper edge 4A) and the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19.

The plate widths H21 and H22 of the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 have the same plate width HB (HB = H21 = H22), and the plate width HD [HD] which is 1/1n of the plate width H19 of the presser plate portion 19. = (1 / n) × H19: However, n is not zero] and the falling bottom distance R is as follows.
The plate thickness HD is, for example, in the range of HD = (1/4) × H19 to (1/2) × H19, preferably HD = (1/2) × H19.
Equation (3) and the equation (3) between the falling angle θA, the plate width HB of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 (or the plate width HA of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21), and the falling bottom distance R. 4) holds.

In the formulas (3) and (4), when the falling bottom distance R and the plate width H19 (HD) of the holding plate portion 19 are set to arbitrary values, the falling angle θA and the first and second upper leg flat plates are set. The plate width HB (H21, H22) of the portions 21 and 22 can be set.
Then, once the falling angle θA is determined, the second acute angle θ2 and the bending angle θD can also be determined.
Each upper rising flat plate portion 21 and 22 has a first and second upper leg flat plate portion as long as the rising angle θA = 0 degrees (0 °) and the range is less than θA = 90 degrees (90 °). Along with the fall of 21 and 22, the start-up is performed at the start-up angle θB corresponding to the start-up angle θA. If the rising angle θA = 0 degrees (0 °), the bending angle θD = 180 degrees (180 °), and the upper rising flat plate portions 21 and 22 are the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21. , 22 does not rise to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing plate portion 19 due to the rising of the pressing plate portion 19 on the front surface 19X side.
The plate widths H21 and H22 (sixth interval P6) of the first and second upper leg plate portions 21 and 22 are the plate width H19 of the presser plate portion 19. Depends on (7th interval P7), if the plate width H19 and the vertical bottom distance R of the holding plate portion 19 are set to arbitrary values, it can be determined by the equations (3) and (4).
The relationship of the formulas (1) to (4) can also be applied to the packing cushioning materials X2, X3, X4, X5, X6 of the second to sixth embodiments.

<Second Embodiment>
The packing cushioning material X2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 59.
In FIGS. 42 to 59, the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 1 to 41 have the same members and the same configuration, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Further, for convenience of explanation, first, the packed cushioning material X2 of the second embodiment developed before assembly will be described, and then the packing cushioning material X2 of the second embodiment is assembled to pack the article (commodity). The procedure (assembly and packaging method) will be explained.

In FIGS. 42 to 47, the packing cushioning material X2 of the second embodiment (hereinafter referred to as “packing cushioning material X2”) includes a foundation flat plate body 1, a presser sheet 2, a load reinforcing flat plate 35, and a presser reinforcing flat plate 36. Be prepared.

In the packing cushioning material X2, the foundation flat plate body 1 has a foundation bending straight line LX and a pair of left and right reference cut straight lines LY, LY as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41 (FIGS. 42 to 47). reference).
The basic flat plate 1 is composed of a lower flat plate 3 and an upper flat plate 4 as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41 (see FIGS. 42 to 47).

In the packing cushioning material X2, the lower flat plate 3 has a pair of upper and lower first bent straight lines L1, L1, a pair of left and right second bent straight lines L2, L2, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 3rd folding straight line L3, L3, a pair of left and right 4th folding straight lines L4, L4, a pair of left and right 5th folding straight lines L5, L5, a pair of left and right 6th folding straight lines L6, L6, a pair of left and right It has 1 lower bent hole 5, 5 and a pair of left and right second lower bent holes 6, 6. The lower plate 3 has a plate upper edge 3A, a plate lower edge 3B, and a pair of left and right plate lower side edges 3C and 3D (see FIGS. 42 to 44).

In the packing cushioning material X2, the lower flat plate 3 has a loading flat plate portion 7, a loading window hole 8, a first lower leg flat plate portion 9, and a second lower leg flat plate portion, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 10. It is composed of a pair of left and right lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12, a pair of left and right first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14, and a pair of left and right second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 (FIGS. 42 to 42). See 47).

In the packing cushioning material X2, the upper flat plate 4 has a pair of upper and lower 7th bent straight lines L7, L7, a pair of left and right 8th bent straight lines L8, L8, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 9th folding straight line L9, L9, pair of left and right 10th folding straight lines L10, L10, pair of left and right 11th folding straight lines L11, L11, pair of left and right 12th folding straight lines L12, L12, pair of left and right It has 13 bent straight lines L13, L13, a pair of left and right bent straight lines L14, L14, a pair of left and right first upper bent holes 17, 17, and a pair of left and right second upper bent holes 18, 18. The upper flat plate 4 has a plate upper edge 4A, a plate lower edge 4B, and a pair of left and right plate upper edges 4C and 4D (see FIGS. 42 to 44).

In the packing cushioning material X2, the upper flat plate 4 has a presser plate portion 19, a presser window hole 20, a first upper leg flat plate portion 21, a second upper leg flat plate portion 22, and the upper flat plate portion 4, as described with reference to FIGS. It is composed of a pair of left and right upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24, a pair of left and right third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26, and a pair of left and right fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 (see FIGS. 42 to 47). ..

In the packing cushioning material X2, the loading window hole 8 has a loading window hole portion 37 as shown in FIGS. 42 to 46. The loading window hole portion 37 is arranged inside the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is formed in a rectangular shape, for example. As shown in FIG. 42, the loading window hole portion 37 is arranged at each of the window hole upper edge 8A and the window hole lower edge 8B with a first reinforcement interval PA in the vertical direction UD. The loading window hole portion 37 is arranged at each of the window hole right edge 8C and the window hole left edge 8D in the left-right direction LD, separated by a second reinforcement interval PB.
The loading window hole portion 37 is a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) long in the left-right direction LR in parallel with the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D of the loading window hole 8. Is formed in.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 46, the loading reinforcing flat plate 35 is arranged inside the loading window hole 8 (inside the loading window hole edge). The loading reinforcing flat plate 35 is a loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is a loading flat plate portion 7 along the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. It is connected (adjacent) to. The loading reinforcing flat plate 35 is supported (held) by the loading flat plate portion 7.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 46, the load reinforcing flat plate 35 is composed of a plurality (4 sheets) of the load reinforcing flat plates 38, 38, .... Each of the load reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ... Is partitioned by a plurality (4) load cut straight lines (load cut lines) LK, LK, .... Each of the loading reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ... Is the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and includes the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. It extends between the loading window holes 37.
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, each of the loading cut straight lines LK, LK, ... Is the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, and the window hole right. It extends from the edge 8C and the left edge 8D of the window hole and is opened in the loading window hole portion 37. Each loading cut straight line LK, LK, ... Penetrates the loading reinforcing flat plate 35 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) and reaches the front surface 35X (front plane) and the back surface 35Y (back plane) of the loading reinforcing flat plate 35. Open.
As shown in FIG. 42, each loading cut straight line LK, LK, ... Each window intersection Qa, for example, the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. In Qb, Qc, Qd, it extends between each window intersection Qa, Qb, Qc, Qd and the loading window hole 37. As shown in FIG. 43, each loading cut straight line LK, LK, ... Has a cut angle θK [for example, a cut angle θK in the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. θK = 45 degrees (45 °)], and it extends from each window intersection Qa, Qb, Qc, Qd.

In the packing cushioning material X2, the presser window hole 20 has a presser window hole portion 41 as shown in FIGS. 42 to 45 and 47. The presser window hole portion 41 is arranged inside the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, and is formed in a rectangular shape, for example. As shown in FIG. 42, the presser window hole portion 41 is arranged at each of the window hole upper edge 20A and the window hole lower edge 20B with a first reinforcement interval PA in the vertical direction UD. The presser window hole portion 41 is arranged at each of the window hole right edge 20C and the window hole left edge 20D in the left-right direction LD, separated by a second reinforcement interval PB.
The presser window hole portion 41 is a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) long in the left-right direction LR in parallel with the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window hole left edge 20D of the presser window hole 20. Is formed in.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 is arranged inside the presser window hole 20 (inside the presser window hole edge). The presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 is a presser foot hole edge of the presser window hole 20, and is a presser plate portion 19 along the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window hole left edge 20D. It is connected (adjacent) to. The presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 is supported (held) by the presser foot plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45 and 47, the presser reinforcing flat plate 36 is composed of a plurality (4 pieces) presser reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, .... Each of the presser foot reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, ... Is partitioned by a plurality of (four) presser cut straight lines (presser cut lines) LM, LM, .... Each of the presser foot reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, ... Is the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, and includes the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C and the window hole left edge 20D. It extends between the presser window holes 41.
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, each of the presser foot cut straight lines LM, LM ... Is the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, and is the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, and the window hole right edge. It extends from 20C and the left edge 20D of the window hole, and is opened in the presser window hole portion 41. Each presser foot cut straight line LM, LM, ... Penetrates the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) and reaches the front surface 36X (front plane) and the back surface 36Y (back plane) of the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36. Open.
As shown in FIG. 43, each of the presser foot cut straight lines LM, LM, ... Is, for example, each window intersection Qe of the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window hole left edge 20D. In Qf, Qg, Qh, it extends between each window intersection Qe, Qf, Qg, Qh and the presser window hole 41. As shown in FIG. 42, each presser cut straight line LM, LM, ... Has a cut angle θK [for example, a cut angle θK at the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window hole left edge 20D. θK = 45 degrees (45 °)], and it extends from each window intersection Qe, Qf, Qg, Qh.

<Packing of goods (goods)>
Next, a procedure (assembly and packing method) for assembling the packing cushioning material X2 and packing the article Z (commodity) will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 59.

First, in the developed packing cushioning material X2, the article Z (commodity) is loaded (placed) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 (see FIG. 48).
As shown in FIG. 48, the article Z is arranged in the loading window hole 8 (inside the loading window hole 8) from the surface 3X of the lower plate 3, and is placed on the first pressing sheet portion 2A (first pressing sheet portion 2A). (On the surface of) and on the loading reinforcing flat plate 35 (on each loading reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ...).
At this time, the article Z is the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is not loaded across the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. , It is loaded (mounted) on the first presser 1 sheet portion 2A inside the loading window hole 8 and on each loading reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ....

In FIGS. 48 and 49, the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 along the reference bending straight line LX. The upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 along the reference bending straight line LX with the surface 4X directed toward the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is folded with the surface 22X of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 toward the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is folded back to the surface 9X (front plane) of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 along the curved straight line LX.
As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces 27X and 28X of the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 as the surfaces of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14. It is folded back toward the surfaces 13X and 14X (front plane) of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 along the reference cut straight line LY and LY (reference bending straight line LX) toward 13X and 14X.
As a result, the upper flat plate 4 is arranged so as to overlap the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 with the reference bending straight line LX as a boundary (boundary line).
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is arranged so as to overlap the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 with the reference bending straight line LX as a boundary (boundary line).
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces 13X and 14X of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 with the reference cut straight line LY and LY (reference bent straight line LY) as a boundary (boundary line). It is placed on top of the table surface).

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the presser plate portion 19 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the presser window hole 20 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the loading window hole 8 in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has the surface 21X of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 on the second lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 10X (front plane) of the second lower leg plate portion 10 toward the surface 10X of the leg plate portion 10.
As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, each of the upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24 has the surface 23X of each upper rising flat plate portion 23, 24 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 24X is arranged so as to face the surfaces 11X and 12X of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12 and to overlap the surfaces 11X and 12X (front plane) of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12.
As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 have the surfaces of the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 25X and 26X are arranged so as to face the surfaces 15X and 16X of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 on the surfaces 15X and 16X (front plane) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 respectively.
As shown in FIG. 48, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 11th bent straight lines L11 and L11 and the 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12 (each 13th interval) in a state of being overlapped on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged on P13).
As shown in FIG. 48, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 13th bent straight lines L13 and L13 and the 14th bent straight lines L14 and L14 (each 13th interval) in a state of being overlapped on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. On P13), the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged.

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the second presser sheet portion 2B has the surface of the second presser sheet portion 2B first in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A toward the surface of the presser sheet portion 2A.
As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the second presser sheet portion 2B covers the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3. , Abuts on article Z.
At this time, the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A is the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window. It comes into contact with the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20 (inside the presser window hole 20) without touching the left edge 20D of the hole.
As a result, the presser sheet 2 puts the article Z (commodity) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. Deploy.
In the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36, each presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion 42, 42, ... As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, each presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion 42, 42, ... ... Is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of each of the load-reinforcing plate portions 38, 38, ...
As a result, the presser reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, ... Are brought into contact with the article Z on the first presser sheet portion 2A via the second presser sheet portion 2B.
The load reinforcing flat plate 35 and the presser reinforcing flat plate 36 are provided with the article Z via the first and second presser sheet portions 2A and 2B, and the load reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ... Place it between ...

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 48 to 56, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 which are overlapped with each other are subjected to the upper first bending straight line L1 and the upper seventh folding. It is bent along the straight line L7 to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X (front plane) of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is the first bent straight line L1 (the upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3). It is bent toward the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the above.
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is along the seventh bent straight line L7 (the lower seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4). , The presser plate portion 19 is bent toward the surface 19X side.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 56, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate portion is along the upper first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the 7Y side of the back surface of 7. The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is on the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the surface of the first pressing sheet portion 2A, each loading reinforcing flat plate portion 38) with the upper first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line). Can be hung on the surface of).
As shown in FIG. 56, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the lower seventh bending straight line L7. It is lowered to the 19X side (the surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B, the surface side of each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42). As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, the raised second upper flat plate portion 22 abuts on the surface 9X of the raised first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and abuts on the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is overlaid on 9X. The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is overlapped with the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 that is erected with the lower seventh bent straight line L7 as a boundary (boundary line), and the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed. It is lowered to the surface 19X side of.
In this way, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 arranged so as to be stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 48 to 56, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 which are overlapped with each other are arranged with the lower first bent straight line L1 and the lower seventh bent straight line. It is bent along L7 to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is the first bent straight line L1 (lower first) that separates the first interval P1 from the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). It is bent to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 along one bent straight line).
The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is a seventh bent straight line L7 (upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 1A of the upper flat plate 4). It is bent to the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 along the above.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 56, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and is loaded along the lower first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the lower first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 56, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the upper seventh bent straight line L7. It can be lowered to the side. As shown in FIG. 56, the raised first upper leg flat plate portion 21 abuts on the surface 10X of the raised second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and comes into contact with the surface 10X of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10. Can be stacked. The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is overlapped with the lowered second lower leg flat plate portion 10 with the upper seventh bent straight line L10 as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the surface 19X side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to.
In this way, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 that are stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 52, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 arranged in an overlapping manner are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are lowered. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3C (the lower edge portion 3R of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is the plate upper edge 4C (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the upper edge portion 4R of the plate.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 52, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 52, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the right side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 abuts on the surface 11X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a lower rising flat plate portion 23. It is superimposed on the surface 11X of the portion 11. The upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the lower right side rising flat plate portion 11 and the right side upper rising flat plate portion 23 are loaded with the lowering of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 53, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are lowered. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side) that separates the third interval P3 from the side edge 3D (the lower edge portion 3S of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 has a plate upper edge 4D (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the plate upper edge portion 4S).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 52, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 52, the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the left side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane). It is superposed on the surface 12X of the portion 12. The upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the left lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 are loaded as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the right side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the right side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3J of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the right side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th on the right side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (4L upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the right side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 11 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the left side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the left side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the left side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3K of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the left side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th on the left side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4M upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the left side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 and a standing flat plate portion 12 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the right side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. A third bent straight line L3 (third bent straight line L3 on the right side) and a sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3L of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the 12th on the right side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (the upper edge 4J of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is a second support plate portion that has been raised and folded back and a lower side-raising flat plate portion 11 that has been raised between the raised flat plate portion 23 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 that has been raised. The shaped flat plate portion 15 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the left side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The third bent straight line L3 (the third bent straight line L3 on the left side) and the sixth bent straight line L3 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3M of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (8th folding straight line L8 on the left side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th on the left side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4K on the upper edge of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 8th bent straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th bent straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th bent straight line L12 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised and folded second retaining flat plate portion 12. The shaped flat plate portion 16 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 53, the second presser sheet portion 2B is the article Z as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against (lower plate 3).
As a result, the presser sheet 2 sandwiches the article Z (product) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. And fix the article Z.
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 53, the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 is provided via the second presser sheet portion 2B as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against the article Z (lower flat plate 3).
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the loading reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ... Each window edge 8A to 8D is bent so as to protrude from the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the presser reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, ... Are shown in FIGS. 50 to 53. In the state where the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are raised, each window edge 20A to 20D of the presser window hole 20 is bent as a bent straight line so as to protrude from the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19. Be done.
As a result, the load reinforcing flat plate 35 and the presser reinforcing flat plate 36 sandwich the article Z (commodity) between the load reinforcing flat plate portion 38 and each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42 to hold the article Z. Each load reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ... Presses the article Z toward each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42, 42, ... (Second presser sheet portion 2B), and each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42, 42, ... The article Z is pressed toward each load reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ... (1st presser sheet portion 2A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 have the surface 7X and the presser of the loading flat plate portion 7 from the rising angle θB. It is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 19X of the flat plate portion 19.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 have each second bent straight line L2 and L2 and each third. Along the bent straight lines L3, L3, the fifth bent straight lines L5, L5, and the sixth bent straight lines L6, L6, at positions parallel to the back surfaces 11Y, 12Y of the lower rising flat plate portions 11, 12. It is folded back and raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are the eighth folded straight lines L8, L8, and the ninth folded, respectively. Along the curved straight lines L9, L9, the 11th bent straight lines L11, L11, the 12th bent straight lines L12, L12, the 13th bent straight lines L13, L13, and the 14th bent straight lines L14, L14, respectively. It is folded back at a position parallel to the back surfaces 23Y and 24Y of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24, and is raised at a position perpendicular to the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19.
As a result, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the first holding flat plate portion 13, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 27 are in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55. , Are stacked in parallel with each other. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P3). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the lower rising flat plate portion 12, the first holding flat plate portion 14, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 28 are mutually in the left-right direction LR. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 are the upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the second holding flat plate portion 15, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the third holding flat plate portion 25 are mutually in the left-right direction LR. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 11th and 12th bent straight lines L11 and L11 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 25.
The lower rising flat plate portion 12, the second holding flat plate portion 16, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the third holding flat plate portion 26 are parallel to each other in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55.・ The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 are arranged in an overlapping manner. It is folded between 24 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26.

As shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11 and 12) are respectively. When the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are raised at positions orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, they are arranged in parallel with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The 7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper rising plate portions 23, 24) hold down the upper rising plate portions 23, 24, and the flat plate portion 19 When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19, it is arranged in parallel with the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19.

5th plate lower edge 3N, 3Q of each lower plate 3 and 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q (5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O of each 1st shape-retaining flat plate 13, 14). As shown in FIG. 54, the sixth plate lower edge portions 3P, 3Q) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 are loaded with the first and second shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 to 16 and the flat plate portions 7. When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the above, it is arranged in parallel with the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of each of the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12.
By setting the fourth acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the first acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the lower edge portion of the fifth plate of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 3N, 3O, the lower edge portions 3P, 3Q of the sixth plate of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15, 16 are parallel to the lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. Be placed.
Upper plate upper edge 4N, 4Q of each 5th plate and 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q of the upper plate 4 (5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O of each 3rd shape-retaining flat plate 25, 26, each 4th As shown in FIG. 54, the sixth plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q) of the shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 hold the third and fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 to 28 on the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19. When they are raised at orthogonal positions, they are arranged in parallel with the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the seventh plate of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24.
By setting the 4th acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the 1st acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the upper edge 4N of the 5th plate of the 3rd shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 , 4O, the 6th plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q of each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are arranged in parallel with the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. To.
As a result, the packing cushioning material X2 is assembled by packing the article Z (commodity).

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the packing cushioning material X2 (hereinafter referred to as “assembled and packed packing cushioning material X2”) assembled by packing the article Z (commodity) is transported (transported). It is stored in the rectangular packing box B.
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X2 is stored in the packing box B from the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7.
As shown in FIG. 59, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X2 includes the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 (on the plate of the lower flat plate 3). The edge 3A and the lower edge 3B of the plate, the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the lower edge 4B of the plate) are in contact with the bottom plate 101 of the packing box B. It is stored in the packing box B.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the packing cushioning material X2 assembled and packed includes the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in the side flat plate 52 of the packing box B. It abuts on 52 and is stored in the packing box B.
Subsequently, the lid flat plate 53 of the packing box B is closed, and the lid flat plate 53 is brought into contact with the raised lower raising plate portions 11 and 12 and the raised upper rising flat plates 23 and 24. And carry it.
At this time, the packed cushioning material X2 that has been assembled and packed abuts the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 on the side flat plates 52, 52 of the packing box B. , The assembly of the packing cushioning material X1 is not opened (deployed), the falling angles θA of the first and second lower leg flat plates 9 and 10, and the standing of the first and second upper leg flat plates 21 and 21. The lowering angle θA is maintained.

<Third Embodiment>
The packing cushioning material X3 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 77.
In FIGS. 60 to 77, the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 1 to 41 have the same members and the same configuration, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Further, for convenience of explanation, first, the packed cushioning material X3 of the third embodiment developed before assembly will be described, and then the packing cushioning material X3 of the third embodiment is assembled to pack the article (commodity). The procedure (assembly and packaging method) will be explained.

In FIGS. 60 to 65, the packing cushioning material X3 of the third embodiment (hereinafter referred to as “packing cushioning material X3”) includes a basic flat plate body 1 and a pressing sheet 2.

In the packing cushioning material X3, the foundation flat plate body 1 has a foundation bending straight line LX and a pair of left and right reference cut straight lines LY, LY as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41 (FIGS. 60 to 62). reference).
The basic flat plate 1 is composed of a lower flat plate 3 and an upper flat plate 4 as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41 (see FIGS. 60 to 65).

In the packing cushioning material X3, the lower flat plate 3 has a pair of upper and lower first bent straight lines L1, L1, a pair of left and right second bent straight lines L2, L2, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 3rd folding straight line L3, L3, a pair of left and right 4th folding straight lines L4, L4, a pair of left and right 5th folding straight lines L5, L5, a pair of left and right 6th folding straight lines L6, L6, a pair of left and right It has 1 lower bent hole 5, 5 and a pair of left and right second lower bent holes 6, 6. The lower plate 3 has a plate upper edge 3A, a plate lower edge 3B, and a pair of left and right plate lower side edges 3C and 3D (see FIGS. 60 to 62).

In the packing cushioning material X3, the lower flat plate 3 has a loading flat plate portion 7, a first lower leg flat plate portion 9, a second lower leg flat plate portion 10, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. Lower rising flat plate portions 11, 12, a pair of left and right first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13, 14, a pair of left and right second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15, 16, and a plurality of load-holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... It is configured (see FIGS. 60 to 65).
The packing cushioning material X3 is configured without having the loading window hole 8.

In the packing cushioning material X3, the upper flat plate 4 has a pair of upper and lower 7th bent straight lines L7, L7, a pair of left and right 8th bent straight lines L8, L8, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 9th folding straight line L9, L9, pair of left and right 10th folding straight lines L10, L10, pair of left and right 11th folding straight lines L11, L11, pair of left and right 12th folding straight lines L12, L12, pair of left and right It has 13 bent straight lines L13, L13, a pair of left and right bent straight lines L14, L14, a pair of left and right first upper bent holes 17, 17, and a pair of left and right second upper bent holes 18, 18. The upper flat plate 4 has a plate upper edge 4A, a plate lower edge 4B, and a pair of left and right plate upper edges 4C and 4D (see FIGS. 60 to 62).

In the packing cushioning material X3, the upper flat plate 4 is the same as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. It is composed of a pair of left and right upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24, a pair of left and right third holding flat plate portions 25, 26, and a pair of left and right fourth holding flat plate portions 27, 28 (see FIGS. 60 to 62). ..

Each of the loading plate portions 51, 51, ... Is formed on the loading plate portion 7 as shown in FIGS. 60 to 64. Each of the load holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Is partitioned by a plurality (4) holding cut straight lines (holding cut lines) LN, LN, ....
Each holding cut straight line LN, LN, ... Is arranged on the loading plate portion 7 as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61. The holding cut straight lines LN, LN, ... Are formed so as to be separated from each other by a cut spacing PN (holding cut spacing) in the left-right direction LR, and are arranged in parallel with the fourth bending straight lines L4 and L4. Each holding-in straight line LN, LN, ... Extends between the first bending straight lines L1 and L1 in the vertical direction UD and intersects the first bending straight lines L1 and L1.
Each holding cut straight line LN, LN, ... Penetrates the loading flat plate portion 7 in the front-rear direction FR (plate thickness direction) and opens to the front surface 7X and the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7.
As a result, the load holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Are partitioned by the holding cut straight lines LN, LN, ... In the left-right direction LR, and are formed between the holding cut straight lines LN, LN, ... Will be done.
The load holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Extend between the first bending straight lines L1, L1 in the vertical direction UD.

In the packing cushioning material X3, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the presser window hole 20 has the window hole upper edge 20A arranged along the upper first bending straight line L1 and the window hole lower edge 20B below. It is arranged along the first bending straight line L1 on the side and is formed on the presser plate portion 19.

In the packing cushioning material X3, the first presser sheet portion 2A is loaded (laminated) on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7 as shown in FIGS. 60 to 62. The first presser sheet portion 2A covers the load holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... And is fixed to the lower flat plate 3.
As shown in FIG. 60, the first presser sheet portion 2A extends between the first bending straight lines L1 and L1 on each of the fourth bending straight lines L4 and L4 side from the holding cut straight lines LN, LN, ... , Is fixed to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7. The first presser sheet portion 2A is fixed to the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the surface 10X of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 across the fourth bent straight lines L4 and L4. ..

<Packing of goods (goods)>
Next, a procedure (assembly and packing method) for assembling the packing cushioning material X3 and packing the article Z (commodity) will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74.

First, in the developed packing cushioning material X3, the article Z (commodity) is loaded (placed) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 (see FIG. 66).
As shown in FIG. 66, the article Z is arranged in the loading window hole 8 (inside the loading window hole 8) from the surface 3X of the lower plate 3, and is placed on the first presser sheet portion 2A (first presser sheet portion 2A). (Surface), and each load holding flat plate portion 51, 51, ... Is loaded (placed) on it.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 66, the article Z is loaded on the first pressing sheet portion 2A and on the loading holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Across the holding cut straight lines LP, LP, ... Will be done.

In FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 along the reference bending straight line LX. The upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 along the reference bending straight line LX with the surface 4X directed toward the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is folded with the surface 22X of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 toward the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is folded back to the surface 9X (front plane) of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 along the curved straight line LX.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces 27X and 28X of the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 as the surfaces of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14. It is folded back toward the surfaces 13X and 14X (front plane) of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 along the reference cut straight line LY and LY (reference bending straight line LX) toward 13X and 14X.
As a result, the upper flat plate 4 is arranged so as to overlap the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 with the reference bending straight line LX as a boundary (boundary line).
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is arranged so as to overlap the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 with the reference bending straight line LX as a boundary (boundary line).
The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces 13X and 14X of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 with the reference cut straight line LY and LY (reference bent straight line LY) as a boundary (boundary line). It is placed on top of the table surface).

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the presser plate portion 19 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the presser window hole 20 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the loading window hole 8 in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has the surface 21X of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 on the second lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The surface 10X of the leg plate portion 10 is directed, and the surface 10X (front plane) of the second lower leg plate portion 10 is overlapped with each other.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, each of the upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24 has the surface 23X of each upper rising flat plate portion 23, 24 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 24X is arranged so as to face the surfaces 11X and 12X of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12 and to overlap the surfaces 11X and 12X (front plane) of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 have the surfaces of the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 25X and 26X are arranged so as to face the surfaces 15X and 16X of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 on the surfaces 15X and 16X (front plane) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 respectively.
As shown in FIG. 57, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 11th bent straight lines L11 and L11 and the 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12 (each 13th interval) in a state of being overlapped on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged on P13).
As shown in FIG. 67, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 13th bent straight lines L13 and L13 and the 14th bent straight lines L14 and L14 (each 13th interval) in a state of being overlapped on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. On P13), the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged.

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the second presser sheet portion 2B has the surface of the second presser sheet portion 2B first in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A toward the surface of the presser sheet portion 2A.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the second presser sheet portion 2B covers the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3. , Abuts on article Z.
At this time, the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A is the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window. It comes into contact with the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20 (inside the presser window hole 20) without touching the left edge 20D of the hole.
As a result, the presser sheet 2 puts the article Z (commodity) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. Deploy.
Each of the load holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Places the article Z between the upper flat plate 4 and the second pressing sheet portion 2B in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 to hold the article Z. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 74, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 which are overlapped with each other are subjected to the upper first bending straight line L1 and the upper seventh folding. It is bent along the straight line L7 to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X (back plane) of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is the first bent straight line L1 (the upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3). It is bent toward the back surface 7Y side of the loading plate portion 7 (the back surface 51Y side of each loading plate portion 51) along the above.
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is along the seventh bent straight line L7 (the lower seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4). , The presser plate portion 19 is bent toward the surface 19X side.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 74, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate portion 9 is formed along the upper first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the 7Y side of the back surface of 7. The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is hung on the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the back surface 51Y side of each loading flat plate portion 51) with the upper first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line). ..
As shown in FIG. 74, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the lower seventh bent straight line L7. It is lowered to the 19X side (the surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B). As shown in FIGS. 71 and 74, the raised second upper flat plate portion 22 abuts on the surface 9X of the raised first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and abuts on the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is overlaid on 9X. The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is overlapped with the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 that is erected with the lower seventh bent straight line L7 as a boundary (boundary line), and the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed. It is lowered to the surface 19X side of.
In this way, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 arranged so as to be stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 68 to 74, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 which are overlapped with each other are arranged with the lower first bent straight line L1 and the lower seventh bent straight line. It is bent along L7 to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is the first bent straight line L1 (lower first) that separates the first interval P1 from the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). It is bent to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 along one bent straight line).
The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is a seventh bent straight line L7 (upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 1A of the upper flat plate 4). It is bent to the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 along the above.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 74, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and is loaded along the lower first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is on the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the back surface 51Y side of each loading holding flat plate portion 51, 51, ...) With the lower first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line). ).
As shown in FIG. 74, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the upper seventh bent straight line L7. It is lowered to the side (the surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B). As shown in FIG. 74, the raised first upper leg flat plate portion 21 abuts on the surface 10X of the raised second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and comes into contact with the surface 10X of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10. Can be stacked. The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is overlapped with the lowered second lower leg flat plate portion 10 with the upper seventh bent straight line L10 as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the surface 19X side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to.
In this way, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 that are stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 67 to 71, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are lowered. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3C (the lower edge portion 3R of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is the plate upper edge 4C (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the upper edge portion 4R of the plate.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 70, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 70, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the right side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 abuts on the surface 11X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a lower rising flat plate portion 23. It is superimposed on the surface 11X of the portion 11. The upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the back Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the lower right side rising flat plate portion 11 and the right side upper rising flat plate portion 23 are loaded with the lowering of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 67 to 71, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are lowered. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side) that separates the third interval P3 from the side edge 3D (the lower edge portion 3S of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 has a plate upper edge 4D (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the plate upper edge portion 4S).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 70, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 70, the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the left side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane). It is superposed on the surface 12X of the portion 12. The upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the left lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 are loaded as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the right side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the right side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3J of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the right side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th on the right side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (4L upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the right side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 11 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the left side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the left side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the left side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3K of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the left side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th on the left side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4M upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the left side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 12 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the right side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. A third bent straight line L3 (third bent straight line L3 on the right side) and a sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3L of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the 12th on the right side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (the upper edge 4J of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is a second support plate portion that has been raised and folded back and a lower side-raising flat plate portion 11 that has been raised between the raised flat plate portion 23 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 that has been raised. The shaped flat plate portion 15 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the left side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The third bent straight line L3 (the third bent straight line L3 on the left side) and the sixth bent straight line L3 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3M of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (8th folding straight line L8 on the left side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th on the left side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4K on the upper edge of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 8th bent straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th bent straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th bent straight line L12 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised and folded second retaining flat plate portion 12. The shaped flat plate portion 16 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and is folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, the second presser sheet portion 2B is the article Z as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against (lower plate 3).
As a result, the presser sheet 2 sandwiches the article Z (product) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. And fix the article Z.
As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the loaded holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Can project from the back surface 7Y of the loaded flat plate portion 7 with the first bent straight lines L1 and L1 as the bent straight lines. , The article Z is pressed toward the second pressing sheet portion 2B.
As a result, the loading holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Hold the article Z on the first pressing sheet portion 2A, and sandwich the article Z with the second pressing sheet portion 2B.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 have the surface 7X and the presser of the loading flat plate portion 7 from the rising angle θB. It is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 have each second bent straight line L2 and L2 and each third. Along the bent straight lines L3, L3, the fifth bent straight lines L5, L5, and the sixth bent straight lines L6, L6, at positions parallel to the back surfaces 11Y, 12Y of the lower rising flat plate portions 11, 12. It is folded back and raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are the eighth folded straight lines L8, L8, and the ninth folded, respectively. Along the curved straight lines L9, L9, the 11th bent straight lines L11, L11, the 12th bent straight lines L12, L12, the 13th bent straight lines L13, L13, and the 14th bent straight lines L14, L14, respectively. It is folded back at a position parallel to the back surfaces 23Y and 24Y of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24, and is raised at a position perpendicular to the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19.
As a result, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the first holding flat plate portion 13, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 27 are in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73. , Are stacked in parallel with each other. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P3). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the lower rising flat plate portion 12, the first holding flat plate portion 14, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 28 are mutually in the left-right direction LR. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 are the upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the second holding flat plate portion 15, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the third holding flat plate portion 25 are mutually in the left-right direction LR. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 11th and 12th bent straight lines L11 and L11 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 25.
The lower rising flat plate portion 12, the second holding flat plate portion 16, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the third holding flat plate portion 26 are parallel to each other in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73.・ The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 are arranged in an overlapping manner. It is folded between 24 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26.

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11 and 12) are respectively. When the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are raised at positions orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, they are arranged in parallel with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The 7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper rising plate portions 23, 24) hold down the upper rising plate portions 23, 24, and the flat plate portion 19 When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19, it is arranged in parallel with the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19.

5th plate lower edge 3N, 3Q of each lower plate 3 and 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q (5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O of each 1st shape-retaining flat plate 13, 14). As shown in FIG. 72, the sixth plate lower edge portions 3P, 3Q) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 are loaded with the first and second shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 to 16 and the flat plate portions 7. When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the above, it is arranged in parallel with the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of each of the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12.
By setting the fourth acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the first acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the lower edge portion of the fifth plate of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 3N, 3O, the lower edge portions 3P, 3Q of the sixth plate of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15, 16 are parallel to the lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. Be placed.
Upper plate upper edge 4N, 4Q of each 5th plate and 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q of the upper plate 4 (5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O of each 3rd shape-retaining flat plate 25, 26, each 4th As shown in FIG. 72, the sixth plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q) of the shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 hold the third and fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 to 28 on the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19. When they are raised at orthogonal positions, they are arranged in parallel with the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the seventh plate of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24.
By setting the 4th acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the 1st acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the upper edge 4N of the 5th plate of the 3rd shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 , 4O, the 6th plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q of each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are arranged in parallel with the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. To.
As a result, the packing cushioning material X3 is assembled by packing the article Z (commodity).

As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the packing cushioning material X3 (hereinafter referred to as “assembled and packed packing cushioning material X3”) assembled by packing the article Z (commodity) is transported (transported). It is stored in the rectangular packing box B.
As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X3 is stored in the packing box B from the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7.
As shown in FIG. 77, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X3 includes the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 (on the plate of the lower flat plate 3). The edge 3A and the lower edge 3B of the plate, the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the lower edge 4B) are brought into contact with the bottom plate 101 of the packing box B. It is stored in the packing box B.
Further, as shown in FIG. 76, the packing cushioning material X3 assembled and packed includes the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in the side flat plate 52 of the packing box B. It abuts on 52 and is stored in the packing box B.
Subsequently, the lid flat plate 53 of the packing box B is closed, and the lid flat plate 53 is brought into contact with the raised lower raising plate portions 11 and 12 and the raised upper rising flat plates 23 and 24. And carry it.
At this time, the packed cushioning material X3 that has been assembled and packed abuts the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 on the side flat plates 52, 52 of the packing box B. , The assembly of the packing cushioning material X1 is not opened (deployed), the falling angles θA of the first and second lower leg plate portions 9 and 10, and the standing of the first and second upper leg plate portions 21 and 22. The lowering angle θA is maintained.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The packing cushioning material X4 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 96.
In FIGS. 78 to 96, the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 1 to 41 have the same members and the same configuration, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Further, for convenience of explanation, first, the packed cushioning material X4 of the fourth embodiment developed before assembly will be described, and then the packing cushioning material X4 of the fourth embodiment is assembled to pack the article (commodity). The procedure (assembly and packaging method) will be explained.

In FIGS. 60 to 65, the packing cushioning material X4 of the fourth embodiment (hereinafter referred to as “packing cushioning material X4”) includes a pressing sheet 2, a lower flat plate 3, and an upper flat plate 4.

The lower plate 3 and the upper plate 4 of the packing cushioning material X4 are, for example, the reference bent straight line LX (see FIGS. 1 and 2) in the packing cushioning material X1 (Embodiment 1) described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. ) Is divided into upper and lower parts (cut into a lower plate 3 and an upper plate 4). In the packing cushioning material X4, the reference bent straight line LX of the packing cushioning material X1 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is set to the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 and the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4 (FIGS. 78 to 78 to 2). See FIG. 80).

In the packing cushioning material X4, the lower flat plate 3 has a pair of upper and lower first bent straight lines L1, L1, a pair of left and right second bent straight lines L2, L2, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 3rd folding straight line L3, L3, a pair of left and right 4th folding straight lines L4, L4, a pair of left and right 5th folding straight lines L5, L5, a pair of left and right 6th folding straight lines L6, L6, a pair of left and right It has 1 lower bent hole 5, 5 and a pair of left and right second lower bent holes 6, 6. The lower plate 3 has a plate upper edge 3A, a plate lower edge 3B, and a pair of left and right plate lower side edges 3C and 3D (see FIGS. 78 to 80).

In the packing cushioning material X4, the lower flat plate 3 has a loading flat plate portion 7, a loading window hole 8, a first lower leg flat plate portion 9, and a second lower leg flat plate portion, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 10. It is composed of a pair of left and right lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12, a pair of left and right first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14, and a pair of left and right second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 (FIGS. 78 to FIGS. 84).

In the packing cushioning material X4, the upper flat plate 4 has a pair of upper and lower 7th bent straight lines L7, L7, a pair of left and right 8th bent straight lines L8, L8, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 9th folding straight line L9, L9, pair of left and right 10th folding straight lines L10, L10, pair of left and right 11th folding straight lines L11, L11, pair of left and right 12th folding straight lines L12, L12, pair of left and right It has 13 bent straight lines L13, L13, a pair of left and right bent straight lines L14, L14, a pair of left and right first upper bent holes 17, 17, and a pair of left and right second upper bent holes 18, 18. The upper flat plate 4 has a plate upper edge 4A, a plate lower edge 4B, and a pair of left and right plate upper edges 4C and 4D (see FIGS. 78 to 80).

In the packing cushioning material X4, the upper flat plate 4 is the same as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. It is composed of a pair of left and right upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24, a pair of left and right third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26, and a pair of left and right fourth-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 (see FIGS. 78 to 84). ..
In the packing cushioning material X4, the presser sheet 2 constitutes the first and second presser sheet portions 2A and 2B with two sheets (films) as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80. The first presser sheet portion 2A made of one sheet (film) covers the loading window hole 8 and is laminated on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7 to be loaded, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. It is fixed to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3 along the loading window edge of the window hole 8 (window hole upper edge 8A, window hole lower edge 8B, window hole right edge 8C and window hole left edge 8D) (FIGS. 78 and FIG. See 80). The second presser sheet portion 2B made of one seal (film) covers the presser window hole 20 and is laminated on the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. The presser foot of the window hole 20 is fixed to the surface 4X of the upper plate 4 along the window hole edge (window hole upper edge 20A, window hole lower edge 20B, window hole right edge 20C and window hole left edge 20D) (FIG. 78 and FIG. See FIG. 80).

<Packing of goods (goods)>
Next, a procedure (assembly and packing method) for assembling the packing cushioning material X4 and packing the article Z (commodity) will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 93.

First, in the developed packing cushioning material X4, the article Z (commodity) is loaded (placed) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 (see FIG. 85).
As shown in FIG. 85, the article Z is arranged in the loading window hole 8 (inside the loading window hole 8) from the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3, and is arranged in the first pressing sheet portion 2A (the first pressing sheet portion 2A). It is loaded (placed) on the surface).
At this time, the article Z is the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is loaded without contacting the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. It is loaded (placed) on the first presser sheet portion 2A inside the window hole 8 (on the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A).

In FIGS. 85 and 86, the upper flat plate 4 is loaded (laminated) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 with the surface 4X facing the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.
In the upper plate 4, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 is aligned with the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3, and the plate upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 are aligned with the lower plate 3. It is arranged so as to be aligned with the lower edges 3C and 3D of each plate 3 and overlapped with the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the presser plate portion 19 is arranged so as to be stacked on the loading flat plate portion 7 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 86 and 86, the presser window hole 20 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the loading window hole 8 in a state where the upper plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has the surface 21X of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 on the second lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 10X (front plane) of the second lower leg plate portion 10 toward the surface 10X of the leg plate portion 10.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has the surface 22X of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 on the first lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 9X (front plane) of the first lower leg plate portion 9 toward the surface 9X of the leg plate portion 9.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 have the upper surface rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 on the surface 23X, in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 24X is arranged so as to face the surfaces 11X and 12X of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12 and to overlap the surfaces 11X and 12X (front plane) of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces of the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 27X and 28X are arranged so as to face the surfaces 13X and 14X of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and to overlap the surfaces 13X and 14X (front plane) of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 respectively.

As shown in FIG. 86, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 11th bent straight lines L11 and L11 and the 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12 (each 13th interval) in a state of being loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged on P13).
As shown in FIG. 86, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 13th bent straight lines L13 and L13 and the 14th bent straight lines L14 and L14 (each 13th interval) in a state of being loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. On P13), the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged.

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the second presser sheet portion 2B has the surface of the second presser sheet portion 2B first in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A toward the surface of the presser sheet portion 2A.
As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the second presser sheet portion 2B covers the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. , Abuts on article Z.
At this time, the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A is the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window. It comes into contact with the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20 (inside the presser window hole 20) without touching the left edge 20D of the hole.
As a result, the presser sheet 2 puts the article Z (commodity) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. Deploy.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 86 to 93, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 which are overlapped with each other are subjected to the upper first bending straight line L1 and the upper seventh folding. Bend along the straight line L7 to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the back surface side of the first presser sheet portion 2A) and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19 (the back surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B).
At this time, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is the first bent straight line L1 (the upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3). It is bent toward the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the above.
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is along the seventh bent straight line L7 (the lower seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4). , The presser plate portion 19 is bent toward the surface 19X side.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 93, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate portion 9 is formed along the upper first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the 7Y side of the back surface of 7. The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the back surface side of the first pressing sheet portion 2A) with the upper first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 93, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 (the surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B), and the lower seventh bend is formed. It is lowered to the surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19 along the straight line L7. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 93, the raised second upper flat plate portion 22 abuts on the surface 9X of the raised first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and abuts on the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is overlaid on 9X. The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is overlapped with the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 that is erected with the lower seventh bent straight line L7 as a boundary (boundary line), and the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed. It is lowered to the surface 19X side of.
In this way, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 arranged so as to be stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 93, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 which are overlapped with each other are arranged with the lower first bent straight line L1 and the lower seventh bent straight line. It is bent along L7 to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is the first bent straight line L1 (lower first) that separates the first interval P1 from the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). It is bent to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 along one bent straight line).
The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is a seventh bent straight line L7 (upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 1A of the upper flat plate 4). It is bent to the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 along the above.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 93, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and is loaded along the lower first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the lower first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 93, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the upper seventh bent straight line L7. It can be lowered to the side. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 93, the raised first upper leg flat plate portion 21 abuts on the surface 10X of the raised second lower leg flat plate portion 10 of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10. It is layered on the surface 10X. The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is overlapped with the lowered second lower leg flat plate portion 10 with the upper seventh bent straight line L10 as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the surface 19X side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to.
In this way, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 that are stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 93, the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 that are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, along the 4th folding straight line L4 on the right side and the 10th folding straight line L10 on the right side, the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the surface side of the 1st pressing sheet portion 2A) and the pressing flat plate portion 19 It is raised on the back surface 19Y side (the back surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B).
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are lowered. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3C (the lower edge portion 3R of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is the plate upper edge 4C (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the upper edge portion 4R of the plate.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 89, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 89, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the right side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 abuts on the surface 11X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a lower rising flat plate portion 23. It is superimposed on the surface 11X of the portion 11. The upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the back Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the lower right side rising flat plate portion 11 and the right side upper rising flat plate portion 23 are loaded with the lowering of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 85 to 90, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the lower side rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are raised. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side) that separates the third interval P3 from the side edge 3D (the lower edge portion 3S of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 has a plate upper edge 4D (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the plate upper edge portion 4S).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 89, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 89, the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the left side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane). It is superposed on the surface 12X of the portion 12. The upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the left lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 are loaded as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the right side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the right side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3J of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the right side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th on the right side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (4L upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the right side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 11 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the left side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the left side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the left side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3K of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the left side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th on the left side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4M upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the left side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 12 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the right side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. A third bent straight line L3 (third bent straight line L3 on the right side) and a sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3L of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the 12th on the right side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (the upper edge 4J of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is a second support plate portion that has been raised and folded back and a lower side-raising flat plate portion 11 that has been raised between the raised flat plate portion 23 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 that has been raised. The shaped flat plate portion 15 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the left side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The third bent straight line L3 (the third bent straight line L3 on the left side) and the sixth bent straight line L3 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3M of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (8th folding straight line L8 on the left side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th on the left side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4K on the upper edge of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised and folded second retaining flat plate portion 12. The shaped flat plate portion 16 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and is folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the second presser sheet portion 2B is the article Z as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against (lower plate 3).
As a result, the presser sheet 2 sandwiches the article Z (product) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. And fix the article Z.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 have the surface 7X and the presser of the loading flat plate portion 7 from the rising angle θB. It is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 have each second bent straight line L2 and L2 and each third. Along the bent straight lines L3, L3, the fifth bent straight lines L5, L5, and the sixth bent straight lines L6, L6, at positions parallel to the back surfaces 11Y, 12Y of the lower rising flat plate portions 11, 12. It is folded back and raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the eighth bent straight lines L8 and L8 and the ninth folded straight lines, respectively. Along the curved straight lines L9, L9, the 11th bent straight lines L11, L11, the 12th bent straight lines L12, L12, the 13th bent straight lines L13, L13, and the 14th bent straight lines L14, L14, respectively. It is folded back at a position parallel to the back surfaces 23Y and 24Y of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24, and is raised at a position perpendicular to the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19.
As a result, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the first holding flat plate portion 13, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 27 are in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92. , Are stacked in parallel with each other. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P3). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the lower rising flat plate portion 12, the first holding flat plate portion 14, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 28 are mutually in the left-right direction LR, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 are the upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the second holding flat plate portion 15, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the third holding flat plate portion 25 are mutually in the left-right direction LR. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 11th and 12th bent straight lines L11 and L11 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 25.
The lower rising flat plate portion 12, the second holding flat plate portion 16, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the third holding flat plate portion 26 are parallel to each other in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92.・ The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 are arranged in an overlapping manner. It is folded between 24 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the 7th plate of the lower rising plate portions 11 and 12) are respectively. When the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are raised at positions orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, they are arranged in parallel with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The 7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper rising plate portions 23, 24) hold down the upper rising plate portions 23, 24, and the flat plate portion 19 When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19, it is arranged in parallel with the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19.

5th plate lower edge 3N, 3Q of each lower plate 3 and 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q (5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O of each 1st shape-retaining flat plate 13, 14). As shown in FIG. 91, the sixth plate lower edge portions 3P, 3Q) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 are loaded with the first and second shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 to 16 and the flat plate portions 7. When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the above, it is arranged in parallel with the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of each of the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12.
By setting the fourth acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the first acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the lower edge portion of the fifth plate of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 3N, 3O, the lower edge portions 3P, 3Q of the sixth plate of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15, 16 are parallel to the lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. Be placed.
Upper plate upper edge 4N, 4Q of each 5th plate and 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q of the upper plate 4 (5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O of each 3rd shape-retaining flat plate 25, 26, each 4th As shown in FIG. 91, the sixth plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q) of the shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 hold the third and fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 to 28 on the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19. When they are raised at orthogonal positions, they are arranged in parallel with the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the seventh plate of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24.
By setting the 4th acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the 1st acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the upper edge 4N of the 5th plate of the 3rd shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 , 4O, the 6th plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q of each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are arranged in parallel with the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. To.
As a result, the packing cushioning material X4 is assembled by packing the article Z (commodity).

As shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the packing cushioning material X4 (hereinafter referred to as “assembled and packed packing cushioning material X4”) assembled by packing the article Z (commodity) is transported (transported). It is stored in the rectangular packing box B.
As shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X4 is stored in the packing box B from the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7.
As shown in FIG. 96, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X4 includes the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 (on the plate of the lower flat plate 3). The edge 3A and the lower edge 3B of the plate, the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the lower edge 4B of the plate) are in contact with the bottom plate 101 of the packing box B. It is stored in the packing box B.
Further, as shown in FIG. 95, the packing cushioning material X4 assembled and packed includes the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in the side flat plate 52 of the packing box B. It comes into contact with 52 and is stored in the packing box B.
Subsequently, the lid flat plate 53 of the packing box B is closed, and the lid flat plate 53 is brought into contact with the raised lower raising plate portions 11 and 12 and the raised upper rising flat plates 23 and 24. And carry it.
At this time, the packed cushioning material X4 that has been assembled and packed abuts the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 on the side flat plates 52, 52 of the packing box B. , The assembly of the packing cushioning material X1 is not opened (deployed), the falling angles θA of the first and second lower leg plate portions 9 and 10, and the standing of the first and second upper leg plate portions 21 and 22. The lowering angle θA is maintained.

<Embodiment 5>
The packing cushioning material X5 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 115.
In FIGS. 97 to 115, the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 1 to 41 and 69 to 77 have the same members and the same configuration, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Further, for convenience of explanation, first, the packed cushioning material X5 of the fifth embodiment developed before assembly will be described, and then the packing cushioning material X5 of the fifth embodiment is assembled to pack the article (commodity). The procedure (assembly and packaging method) will be explained.

In FIGS. 97 to 103, the packing cushioning material X5 of the fifth embodiment (hereinafter referred to as “packing cushioning material X5”) includes a pressing sheet 2, a lower flat plate 3, and an upper flat plate 4.

The lower plate 3 and the upper plate 4 of the packing cushioning material X5 are, for example, the reference bent straight line LX (see FIGS. 42 and 43) in the packing cushioning material X2 (Embodiment 2) described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 59. It is composed of two upper and lower plates (cut into a lower plate 3 and an upper plate 4) along the above. In the packing cushioning material X5, the reference bent straight line LX of the packing cushioning material X2 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is set to the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 and the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4 (FIGS. 97 to 97). (See FIG. 99).

In the packing cushioning material X5, the lower flat plate 3 has a pair of upper and lower first bent straight lines L1, L1, a pair of left and right second bent straight lines L2, L2, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 3rd folding straight line L3, L3, a pair of left and right 4th folding straight lines L4, L4, a pair of left and right 5th folding straight lines L5, L5, a pair of left and right 6th folding straight lines L6, L6, a pair of left and right It has 1 lower bent hole 5, 5 and a pair of left and right second lower bent holes 6, 6. The lower plate 3 has a plate upper edge 3A, a plate lower edge 3B, and a pair of left and right plate lower side edges 3C and 3D (see FIGS. 97 to 99).

In the packing cushioning material X5, the lower flat plate 3 has a loading flat plate portion 7, a loading window hole 8, a first lower leg flat plate portion 9, and a second lower leg flat plate portion, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 10. It is composed of a pair of left and right lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12, a pair of left and right first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14, and a pair of left and right second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 (FIGS. 99 to 99). See 103).

In the packing cushioning material X5, the upper flat plate 4 has a pair of upper and lower 7th bent straight lines L7, L7, a pair of left and right 8th bent straight lines L8, L8, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 9th folding straight line L9, L9, pair of left and right 10th folding straight lines L10, L10, pair of left and right 11th folding straight lines L11, L11, pair of left and right 12th folding straight lines L12, L12, pair of left and right It has 13 bent straight lines L13, L13, a pair of left and right bent straight lines L14, L14, a pair of left and right first upper bent holes 17, 17, and a pair of left and right second upper bent holes 18, 18. The upper flat plate 4 has a plate upper edge 4A, a plate lower edge 4B, and a pair of left and right plate upper edges 4C and 4D (see FIGS. 97 to 99).

In the packing cushioning material X5, the upper flat plate 4 is the same as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. It is composed of a pair of left and right upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24, a pair of left and right third holding flat plate portions 25, 26, and a pair of left and right fourth holding flat plate portions 27, 28 (see FIGS. 97 to 103). ..

In the packing cushioning material X5, the loading window hole 8 has a loading window hole portion 37 as described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47 (see FIGS. 97 to 100).
In the packing cushioning material X5, the lower flat plate 3 is a load reinforcing flat plate 35 (a plurality of load reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ... And a plurality of reinforcing cut straight lines LM, LM, as described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. , (See FIGS. 97 to 100).

In the packing cushioning material X5, the presser window hole 20 has a presser window hole portion 41 as described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47 (see FIGS. 97 to 99, 102 and 103).
In the packing cushioning material X5, the upper flat plate 4 is a presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 (a plurality of presser foot reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, ... And a plurality of reinforcing cut straight lines LN, LN, as described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. , ...) (See FIGS. 97 to 99, 102 and 103).
In the packing cushioning material X5, the presser sheet 2 constitutes the first presser film portion 2A and the second presser film portion 2B with two sheets (films) as shown in FIGS. 97 and 99. As shown in FIGS. 97 and 99, the first presser film portion 2A made of one sheet (film) includes a loading window hole 8, a loading window hole portion 37, and a loading reinforcing flat plate 35 (each loading reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ... And the loading window hole portion 37) are covered and laminated on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading window edge (window hole upper edge) of the loading window hole 8 is similarly described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 8A, window hole lower edge 8B, window hole right edge 8C and window hole left edge 8D) are fixed to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3 (see FIGS. 97 and 99). As shown in FIGS. 97 and 99, the second presser sheet portion 2B made of one sheet (film) includes a presser window hole 20, a presser window hole 41, and a presser reinforcing flat plate 36 (presser reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42). , ...) Is laminated on the surface 91X of the pressing plate portion 19, and the pressing window edge (window hole upper edge 20A, window hole lower edge 20B) of the pressing window hole 19 is similarly described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. , 20C on the right edge of the window hole and 20D on the left edge of the window hole) and fixed to the surface 4X of the upper flat plate 4 (see FIGS. 97 and 99).

<Packing of goods (goods)>
Next, a procedure (assembly and packing method) for assembling the packing cushioning material X5 and packing the article Z (commodity) will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 112.

First, in the developed packing cushioning material X5, the article Z (commodity) is loaded (placed) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 (see FIG. 104).
As shown in FIG. 104, the article Z is arranged in the loading window hole 8 (inside the loading window hole 8) from the surface 3X of the lower plate 3, and is placed on the first pressing sheet portion 2A (first pressing sheet portion 2A). (On the surface of) and on the loading reinforcing flat plate 35 (on each loading reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ...).
At this time, the article Z is the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole 8, and is not loaded across the window hole upper edge 8A, the window hole lower edge 8B, the window hole right edge 8C, and the window hole left edge 8D. , It is loaded (mounted) on the first pressing sheet portion 2A inside the loading window hole 8 and on the respective loading reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ....

In FIGS. 104 and 105, the upper flat plate 4 is loaded (laminated) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 with the surface 4X facing the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.
In the upper plate 4, for example, as shown in FIG. 105, the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 coincides with the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3, and the plate upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 are aligned with the lower plate 3. It is arranged so as to be aligned with the lower edges 3C and 3D of each plate 3 and overlapped with the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the pressing flat plate portion 19 is arranged so as to be stacked on the loading flat plate portion 7 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the presser window hole 20 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the loading window hole 8 in a state where the upper plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has the surface 21X of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 on the second lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 10X (front plane) of the second lower leg plate portion 10 toward the surface 10X of the leg plate portion 10.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has the surface 22X of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 on the first lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 4X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 9X (front plane) of the first lower leg plate portion 9 toward the surface 9X of the leg plate portion 9.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, each of the upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24 has the surface 23X of each upper rising flat plate portion 23, 24 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 24X is arranged so as to face the surfaces 11X and 12X of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12 and to overlap the surfaces 11X and 12X (front plane) of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces of the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 27X and 28X are arranged so as to face the surfaces 13X and 14X of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and to overlap the surfaces 13X and 14X (front plane) of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 respectively.

As shown in FIG. 105, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 11th bent straight lines L11 and L11 and the 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12 (each 13th interval) in a state of being loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged on P13).
As shown in FIG. 105, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 13th bent straight lines L13 and L13 and the 14th bent straight lines L14 and L14 (each 13th interval) in a state of being loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. On P13), the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged.

In the presser sheet 2, the second presser sheet portion 2B has the surface of the second presser sheet portion 2B first in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A toward the surface of the presser sheet portion 2A.
As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the second presser sheet portion 2B covers the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3. , Abuts on article Z.
At this time, the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A is the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window. It comes into contact with the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20 (inside the presser window hole 20) without touching the left edge 20D of the hole.
As a result, the presser sheet 2 puts the article Z (commodity) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. Deploy.
In the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36, each presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion 42, 42, ... In a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, each presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion 42 , 42, ... Are arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of each load reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ... With the surface of each load reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ... facing the surface.
As a result, the presser reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, ... Are brought into contact with the article Z on the first presser sheet portion 2A via the second presser sheet portion 2B.
The load reinforcing flat plate 35 and the presser reinforcing flat plate 36 are provided with the article Z via the first and second presser sheet portions 2A and 2B, and the load reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ... Place it between ...

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 112, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 which are overlapped with each other are subjected to the upper first bending straight line L1 and the upper seventh folding. It is bent along the straight line L7 to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X (front plane) of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is the first bent straight line L1 (the upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3). It is bent toward the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the above.
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is along the seventh bent straight line L7 (the lower seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4). , The presser plate portion 19 is bent toward the surface 19X side.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 112, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate portion is along the upper first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the 7Y side of the back surface of 7. The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is on the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the back surface of the first pressing sheet portion 2A, each loading reinforcing flat plate portion 38) with the upper first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line). It can be hung on the back side of).
As shown in FIG. 112, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the lower seventh bending straight line L7. It is lowered to the 19X side (the surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B, the surface side of each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42). As shown in FIGS. 109 and 112, the raised second upper flat plate portion 22 abuts on the surface 9X of the raised first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and abuts on the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is overlaid on 9X. The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is overlapped with the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 that is erected with the lower seventh bent straight line L7 as a boundary (boundary line), and the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed. It is lowered to the surface 19X side of.
In this way, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 arranged so as to be stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 112, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 which are overlapped with each other are arranged with the lower first bent straight line L1 and the lower seventh bent straight line. It is bent along L7 to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is the first bent straight line L1 (lower first) that separates the first interval P1 from the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). It is bent to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 along one bent straight line).
The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is a seventh bent straight line L7 (upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 1A of the upper flat plate 4). It is bent to the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 along the above.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 112, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and is loaded along the lower first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the lower first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 112, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the upper seventh bent straight line L7. It can be lowered to the side. As shown in FIGS. 109 and 112, the raised first upper leg flat plate portion 21 abuts on the surface 10X of the raised second lower leg flat plate portion 10 of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10. It is layered on the surface 10X. The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is overlapped with the lowered second lower leg flat plate portion 10 with the upper seventh bent straight line L10 as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the surface 19X side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to.
In this way, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 that are stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 arranged in an overlapping manner are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 106 to 108, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are lowered. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3C (the lower edge portion 3R of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 108, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is the plate upper edge 4C (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the upper edge portion 4R of the plate.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 108, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the right side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 106 to 108, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 abuts on the surface 11X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a lower rising flat plate portion 23. It is superimposed on the surface 11X of the portion 11. The upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the lower right side rising flat plate portion 11 and the right side upper rising flat plate portion 23 are loaded with the lowering of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 106 to 108, the lower side rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are raised. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3D (the lower edge portion 3S of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 108, the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 has a plate upper edge 4D (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the plate upper edge portion 4S).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 108, the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the left side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 106 to 108, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane). It is superposed on the surface 12X of the portion 12. The upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the left lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 are loaded as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the right side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the right side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3J of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the right side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th on the right side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (4L upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the right side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 11 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the left side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the left side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the left side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3K of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the left side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th on the left side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4M upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the left side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 12 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the right side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. A third bent straight line L3 (third bent straight line L3 on the right side) and a sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3L of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the 12th on the right side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (the upper edge 4J of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is a second support plate portion that has been raised and folded back and a lower side-raising flat plate portion 11 that has been raised between the raised flat plate portion 23 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 that has been raised. The shaped flat plate portion 15 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the left side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The third bent straight line L3 (the third bent straight line L3 on the left side) and the sixth bent straight line L3 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3M of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower side hanging flat plate portion 12 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (8th folding straight line L8 on the left side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th on the left side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4K on the upper edge of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the eighth bent straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh bent straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth bent straight line L12 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised and folded second retaining flat plate portion 12. The shaped flat plate portion 16 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and is folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the second presser sheet portion 2B is the article Z as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against (lower plate 3).
As a result, the presser sheet 2 sandwiches the article Z (product) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. And fix the article Z.
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 is provided via the second presser sheet portion 2B as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against the article Z (lower flat plate 3).
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, each of the loading reinforcing flat plate portions 38, 38, ... Each of the presser foot reinforcing flat plate portions 42, 42, ... Is bent so as to protrude, and as shown in FIGS. 50 to 53, the presser plate portions 20A to 20D of each window edge 20A to 20D of the presser window hole 20 are bent straight lines. It is bent so as to protrude from the back surface 19Y of 19.
As a result, the load reinforcing flat plate 35 and the presser reinforcing flat plate 36 sandwich the article Z (commodity) between the load reinforcing flat plate portion 38 and each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42 to hold the article Z. Each load reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ... Presses the article Z toward each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42, 42, ... (Second presser sheet portion 2B), and each presser reinforcing flat plate portion 42, 42, ... The article Z is pressed toward each load reinforcing flat plate portion 38, 38, ... (1st presser sheet portion 2A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 have the surface 7X and the presser of the loading flat plate portion 7 from the rising angle θB. It is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 19X of the flat plate portion 19.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 have each second bent straight line L2 and L2 and each third. Along the bent straight lines L3, L3, the fifth bent straight lines L5, L5, and the sixth bent straight lines L6, L6, at positions parallel to the back surfaces 11Y, 12Y of the lower rising flat plate portions 11, 12. It is folded back and raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are the eighth folded straight lines L8, L8, and the ninth folded, respectively. Along the curved straight lines L9, L9, the 11th bent straight lines L11, L11, the 12th bent straight lines L12, L12, the 13th bent straight lines L13, L13, and the 14th bent straight lines L14, L14, respectively. It is folded back at a position parallel to the back surfaces 23Y and 24Y of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24, and is raised at a position perpendicular to the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19.
As a result, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the first holding flat plate portion 13, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 27 are in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111. , Are stacked in parallel with each other. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P3). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the lower rising flat plate portion 12, the first holding flat plate portion 14, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 28 are mutually in the left-right direction LR, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 are the upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the second holding flat plate portion 15, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the third holding flat plate portion 25 are mutually in the left-right direction LR, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 11th and 12th bent straight lines L11 and L11 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 25.
The lower rising flat plate portion 12, the second holding flat plate portion 16, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the third holding flat plate portion 26 are parallel to each other in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111.・ The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 are arranged in an overlapping manner. It is folded between 24 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26.

As shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11 and 12) are respectively. When the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are raised at positions orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, they are arranged in parallel with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The 7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper rising plate portions 23, 24) hold down the upper rising plate portions 23, 24, and the flat plate portion 19 When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19, it is arranged in parallel with the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19.

5th plate lower edge 3N, 3Q of each lower plate 3 and 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q (5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O of each 1st shape-retaining flat plate 13, 14). As shown in FIG. 110, the sixth plate lower edge portions 3P, 3Q) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 are loaded with the first and second shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 to 16 and the flat plate portions 7. When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the above, it is arranged in parallel with the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of each of the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12.
By setting the fourth acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the first acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the lower edge portion of the fifth plate of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 3N, 3O, the lower edge portions 3P, 3Q of the sixth plate of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15, 16 are parallel to the lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. Be placed.
Upper plate upper edge 4N, 4Q of each 5th plate and 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q of the upper plate 4 (5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O of each 3rd shape-retaining flat plate 25, 26, each 4th As shown in FIG. 110, the sixth plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q) of the shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 hold the third and fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 to 28 on the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19. When they are raised at orthogonal positions, they are arranged in parallel with the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the seventh plate of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24.
By setting the 4th acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the 1st acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the upper edge 4N of the 5th plate of the 3rd shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 , 4O, the 6th plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q of each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are arranged in parallel with the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. To.
As a result, the packing cushioning material X5 is assembled by packing the article Z (commodity).

As shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the packing cushioning material X5 (hereinafter referred to as “assembled and packed packing cushioning material X5”) assembled by packing the article Z (commodity) is transported (transported). It is stored in the rectangular packing box B.
As shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X5 is housed in the packing box B from the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7.
As shown in FIG. 115, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X5 includes the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 (on the plate of the lower flat plate 3). The edge 3A and the lower edge 3B of the plate, the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the lower edge 4B of the plate) are in contact with the bottom plate 101 of the packing box B. It is stored in the packing box B.
Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the packing cushioning material X5 assembled and packed includes the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in the side flat plate 52 of the packing box B. It abuts on 52 and is stored in the packing box B.
Subsequently, the lid flat plate 53 of the packing box B is closed, and the lid flat plate 53 is brought into contact with the raised lower raising plate portions 11 and 12 and the raised upper rising flat plates 23 and 24. And carry it.
At this time, the packed cushioning material X5 that has been assembled and packed abuts the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 on the side flat plates 52, 52 of the packing box B. , The assembly of the packing cushioning material X1 is not opened (deployed), the falling angles θA of the first and second lower leg plate portions 9 and 10, and the standing of the first and second upper leg plate portions 21 and 22. The lowering angle θA is maintained.

<Embodiment 6>
The packing cushioning material X6 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134.
In FIGS. 116 to 134, the same reference numerals as those in FIGS. 1 to 41 and 60 to 65 have the same members and the same configuration, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Further, for convenience of explanation, first, the packed cushioning material X6 of the sixth embodiment developed before assembly will be described, and then the packing cushioning material X6 of the sixth embodiment will be assembled to pack the article (commodity). The procedure (assembly and packaging method) will be explained.

In FIGS. 116 to 134, the packing cushioning material X6 of the sixth embodiment (hereinafter referred to as “packing cushioning material X6”) includes a pressing sheet 2, a lower flat plate 3, and an upper flat plate 4 (FIGS. 116 to FIGS. See 122).

The lower plate 3 and the upper plate 4 of the packing cushioning material X6 are, for example, the reference bent straight line LX (see FIGS. 60 and 61) in the packing cushioning material X3 (Embodiment 3) described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 77. It is composed of two upper and lower plates (cut into a lower plate 3 and an upper plate 4) along the above. In the packing cushioning material X6, the reference bent straight line LX of the packing cushioning material X3 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is set to the plate upper edge 3A of the lower plate 3 and the plate lower edge 4B of the upper plate 4 (FIGS. 116 to 116 to FIG. See Figure 118).

In the packing cushioning material X6, the lower flat plate 3 has a pair of upper and lower first bent straight lines L1, L1, a pair of left and right second bent straight lines L2, L2, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 3rd folding straight line L3, L3, a pair of left and right 4th folding straight lines L4, L4, a pair of left and right 5th folding straight lines L5, L5, a pair of left and right 6th folding straight lines L6, L6, a pair of left and right It has 1 lower bent hole 5, 5 and a pair of left and right second lower bent holes 6, 6. The lower plate 3 has a plate upper edge 3A, a plate lower edge 3B, and a pair of left and right plate lower side edges 3C, 3D (see FIGS. 116 to 118).

In the packing cushioning material X6, the lower flat plate 3 has a loading flat plate portion 7, a first lower leg flat plate portion 9, a second lower leg flat plate portion 10, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. It is composed of lower side rising flat plate portions 11 and 12, a pair of left and right first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14, and a pair of left and right second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 (see FIGS. 116 to 122).
The packing cushioning material X6 is configured without having the loading window hole 8.

In the packing cushioning material X6, the upper flat plate 4 has a pair of upper and lower 7th bent straight lines L7, L7, a pair of left and right 8th bent straight lines L8, L8, and a pair of left and right, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. 9th folding straight line L9, L9, pair of left and right 10th folding straight lines L10, L10, pair of left and right 11th folding straight lines L11, L11, pair of left and right 12th folding straight lines L12, L12, pair of left and right It has 13 bent straight lines L13, L13, a pair of left and right bent straight lines L14, L14, a pair of left and right first upper bent holes 17, 17, and a pair of left and right second upper bent holes 18, 18. The upper flat plate 4 has a plate upper edge 4A, a plate lower edge 4B, and a pair of left and right plate upper edges 4C and 4D (see FIGS. 116 to 118).

In the packing cushioning material X6, the upper flat plate 4 has a presser plate portion 19, a presser window hole 20, a first upper leg flat plate portion 21, a second upper leg flat plate portion 22, and the upper flat plate portion 4, as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. It is composed of a pair of left and right upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24, a pair of left and right third holding flat plate portions 25, 26, and a pair of left and right fourth holding flat plate portions 27, 28 (see FIGS. 116 to 122). ..

In the packing cushioning material X6, the lower flat plate 3 includes a plurality of load holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... As described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 65, and each load holding flat plate portion 51, 51, ... It is partitioned by a plurality of holding cut straight lines LP, LP, ... (See FIGS. 116 to 120).

In the packing cushioning material X6, the presser window hole 20 has the window hole upper edge 20A and the window hole lower edge 20B arranged along the seventh curved straight line L7, L7, respectively, as described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 65. (See FIGS. 116 and 117).

In the packing cushioning material X6, the first presser sheet portion 2A is loaded (laminated) on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7 in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. , ... Are covered and fixed to the lower plate 3 (see FIGS. 116 to 120).
In the packing cushioning material X6, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 118, the presser sheet 2 constitutes the first presser sheet portion 2A and the second presser sheet portion 2B with two sheets (films). The first presser sheet portion 2B made of one sheet (film) covers the loading and holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... As described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, and covers the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7. And fixed to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3 (see FIGS. 116 and 118). The second presser sheet portion 2B made of one sheet (film) covers the presser window hole 20 and is laminated on the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. It is fixed to the surface 4X of the upper flat plate 4 along the presser window edge of the window hole 20 (window hole upper edge 20A, window hole lower edge 20B, window hole right edge 20C and window hole left edge 20D) (FIGS. 116 and FIG. 118).

<Packing of goods (goods)>
Next, a procedure (assembly and packing method) for assembling the packing cushioning material X6 and packing the article Z (commodity) will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 131.

First, in the developed packing cushioning material X6, the article Z (commodity) is loaded (placed) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 (see FIG. 123).
As shown in FIG. 123, the article Z is arranged in the loading window hole 8 (inside the loading window hole 8) from the surface 3X of the lower plate 3, and is placed on the first pressing sheet portion 2A (first pressing sheet portion 2A). (Surface), and each load holding flat plate portion 51, 51, ... Is loaded (placed) on it.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 123, the article Z is loaded on the first pressing sheet portion 2A and on the loading holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Across the holding cut straight lines LP, LP, ... Will be done.

In FIGS. 123 and 124, the upper flat plate 4 is loaded (laminated) on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 with the surface 4X facing the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.
In the upper plate 4, for example, as shown in FIG. 124, the plate upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 is aligned with the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3, and the plate upper edges 4C and 4D of the upper plate 4 are aligned with the lower plate 3. It is arranged so as to be aligned with the lower edges 3C and 3D of each plate 3 and overlapped with the surface 3X of the lower plate 3.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the pressing flat plate portion 19 is arranged so as to be stacked on the loading flat plate portion 7 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the presser window hole 20 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the loading window hole 8 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3.

As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has the surface 21X of the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 on the second lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 10X (front plane) of the second lower leg plate portion 10 toward the surface 10X of the leg plate portion 10.

As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has the surface 22X of the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 on the first lower side in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface 9X (front plane) of the first lower leg plate portion 9 toward the surface 9X of the leg plate portion 9.

As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, each of the upper rising flat plate portions 23, 24 has a surface 23X of each upper rising flat plate portion 23, 24 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 24X is arranged so as to face the surfaces 11X and 12X of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12 and to overlap the surfaces 11X and 12X (front plane) of the lower rising flat plates 11 and 12.

As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 have the surfaces of the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. 27X and 28X are arranged so as to face the surfaces 13X and 14X of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and to overlap the surfaces 13X and 14X (front plane) of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 respectively.

As shown in FIG. 124, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 11th bent straight lines L11 and L11 and the 12th bent straight lines L12 and L12 (each 13th interval) in a state of being loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. The sixth bent straight lines L6 and L6 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged on P13).
As shown in FIG. 124, the upper flat plate 4 is placed between the 13th bent straight lines L13 and L13 and the 14th bent straight lines L14 and L14 (each 13th interval) in a state of being loaded on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3. On P13), the fifth bent straight lines L5 and L5 of the lower flat plate 3 are arranged.

In the presser sheet 2, the second presser sheet portion 2B has the surface of the second presser sheet portion 2B first in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3 as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124. It is arranged so as to be overlapped with the surface of the first presser sheet portion 2A toward the surface of the presser sheet portion 2A.
As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the second presser sheet portion 2B covers the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A in a state where the upper plate 4 is folded back to the surface 3X of the lower plate 3. , Abuts on article Z.
At this time, the article Z (commodity) on the first presser sheet portion 2A is the window hole edge of the presser window hole 20, the window hole upper edge 20A, the window hole lower edge 20B, the window hole right edge 20C, and the window hole. It comes into contact with the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20 (inside the presser window hole 20) without touching the left edge 20D.
As a result, the presser sheet 2 puts the article Z (commodity) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. Deploy.
Each of the load holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Places the article Z between the upper flat plate 4 and the second pressing sheet portion 2B in a state where the upper flat plate 4 is folded back on the surface 3X of the lower flat plate 3 to hold the article Z. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 124 to 131, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 which are overlapped with each other are subjected to the upper first bending straight line L1 and the upper seventh folding. It is bent along the straight line L7 to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X (back plane) of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is the first bent straight line L1 (the upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the plate upper edge 3A of the lower flat plate 3). It is bent toward the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the above.
The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is along the seventh bent straight line L7 (the lower seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the reference bent straight line LX (the lower edge 4B of the upper flat plate 4). , The presser plate portion 19 is bent toward the surface 19X side.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 131, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 has a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate portion 9 is formed along the upper first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the 7Y side of the back surface of 7. The first lower leg flat plate portion 9 is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the upper first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 131, the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the lower seventh bending straight line L7. It can be lowered to the 19X side. As shown in FIGS. 128 and 131, the raised second upper flat plate portion 22 abuts on the surface 9X of the raised first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and abuts on the surface of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9. It is overlaid on 9X. The second upper leg flat plate portion 22 is overlapped with the surface 9X of the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 that is erected with the lower seventh bent straight line L7 as a boundary (boundary line), and the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed. It is lowered to the surface 19X side of.
In this way, the first lower leg flat plate portion 9 and the second upper leg flat plate portion 22 arranged so as to be stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 125 to 131, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 which are overlapped with each other are arranged with the lower first bent straight line L1 and the lower seventh bent straight line. It is bent along L7 to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19.
At this time, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is the first bent straight line L1 (lower side first) that separates the first interval P1 from the plate lower edge 1B of the base plate body 1 (the plate lower edge 3B of the lower plate 3). It is bent to the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 along one bent straight line).
The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is a seventh bent straight line L7 (upper seventh bent straight line) that separates the sixth interval P6 from the plate upper edge 1A of the foundation flat plate body 1 (the plate upper edge 1A of the upper flat plate 4). It is bent to the surface 19X of the presser plate portion 19 along the above.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 131, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 forms a falling angle θA on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and is loaded along the lower first bending straight line L1. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7. The second lower leg flat plate portion 10 is on the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7 (the back surface 51Y side of each loading holding flat plate portion 51, 51, ...) With the lower first bending straight line L1 as a boundary (boundary line). ).
As shown in FIG. 131, the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 has a falling angle θA on the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and the surface 19X of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the upper seventh bent straight line L7. It is lowered to the side (the surface side of the second presser sheet portion 2B). As shown in FIG. 74, the raised first upper leg flat plate portion 21 abuts on the surface 10X of the raised second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and comes into contact with the surface 10X of the second lower leg flat plate portion 10. Can be stacked. The first upper leg flat plate portion 21 is overlapped with the lowered second lower leg flat plate portion 10 with the upper seventh bent straight line L10 as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the surface 19X side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to.
In this way, the second lower leg flat plate portion 10 and the first upper leg flat plate portion 21 that are stacked are simultaneously bent and loaded on the back surface 7Y of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is lowered to the back surface 7Y side of the flat plate portion 7 and the front surface 19X side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 124 to 128, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 which are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are raised. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the right side) separating the third interval P3 from the side edge 3C (the lower edge portion 3R of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is the plate upper edge 4C (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the right side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the upper edge portion 4R of the plate.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 127, the lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 on the right side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 127, the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the right side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 128 to 131, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 abuts on the surface 11X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a lower rising flat plate portion 23. It is superimposed on the surface 11X of the portion 11. The upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the back Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the lower right side rising flat plate portion 11 and the right side upper rising flat plate portion 23 are loaded with the lowering of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 124 to 128, the lower rising flat plate portions 12 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 that are stacked are the standing of the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the lowering, it is raised on the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19 along the fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side and the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, the lower side rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is under the plate of the lower flat plate 3 as the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 are raised. Fold to the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 along the fourth bending straight line L4 (fourth folding straight line L4 on the left side) that separates the third interval P3 from the side edge 3D (the lower edge portion 3S of the seventh plate). Can be bent.
As shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 has a plate upper edge 4D (7th) of the upper flat plate 4 as the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is bent toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 along the tenth bending straight line L10 (the tenth folding straight line L10 on the left side) separating the ninth interval P9 from the plate upper edge portion 4S).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 127, the lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side forms a rising angle θB on the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, and the loading flat plate is formed along the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side. It is raised to the surface 7X side of the portion 7. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 on the left side is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the fourth bent straight line L4 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line).
As shown in FIG. 127, the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side has a rising angle θB on the back surface 19Y of the pressing plate portion 19, and the back surface of the pressing flat plate portion 19 is formed along the tenth bending straight line L10 on the left side. It is launched on the 19Y side. As shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane) of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 24 abuts on the surface 12X (front plane). It is superposed on the surface 12X of the portion 12. The upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side is overlapped with the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 with the 10th bent straight line L10 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is placed on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19. It is launched in.
In this way, the left lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the left upper rising flat plate portion 24 are loaded as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is raised on the front surface 7X side of the flat plate portion 7 and on the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19.

As shown in FIGS. 124 to 128, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the right side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the right side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the right side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3J of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the right side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th on the right side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (4L upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 127, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the right side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the right side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the right side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the right side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 11 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 11 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 23. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 on the right side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the right side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. Along with the fall, the 2nd folding straight line L2 on the left side, the 5th folding straight line L5 on the left side, the 9th folding straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The second bent straight line L2 (the second bent straight line L2 on the left side) and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3K of the third plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 9th bent straight line L9 (9th bent straight line L9 on the left side), the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th on the left side, which separate the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4M upper edge of the 4th board). It is bent along the bending straight line L14 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the second bent straight line L2 on the left side and the fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side is along the ninth folding straight line L9 on the left side, the thirteenth folding straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 27 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 9th bent straight line L9 on the left side, the 13th bent straight line L13 on the left side, and the 14th bent straight line L14 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side has a raised lower rising flat plate portion 12 and a standing lower rising flat plate portion 12 between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24. The raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the holding flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The 4th shape-retaining flat plate portion 28 on the left side was raised between the 13th folding straight line L13 on the left side and the 14th folding straight line L14 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 (fifth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 that are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the right side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the right side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side. It is raised to the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the 23X side of the surface of 23.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. A third bent straight line L3 (third bent straight line L3 on the right side) and a sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3C of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3L of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (the 8th folding straight line L8 on the right side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the 12th on the right side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4C of the board (the upper edge 4J of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 on the right side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 11. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the right side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the right side as a boundary (boundary line), and is on the right side. It is folded back to the back surface 11Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 11.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the right side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the right side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the right side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 8th bent straight line L8 on the right side, the 11th bent straight line L11 on the right side, and the 12th bent straight line L12 on the right side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side is a second support plate portion that has been raised and folded back and a lower side-raising flat plate portion 11 that has been raised between the raised flat plate portion 23 and the upper rising flat plate portion 23 that has been raised. The shaped flat plate portion 15 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and folded back on the front surface 23X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 23 on the right side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 25 on the right side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the right side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the right side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the right side) are arranged (positioned).

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 which are stacked are the lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. With the fall, the 3rd folding straight line L3 on the left side, the 6th folding straight line L6 on the left side, the 8th folding straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side. The loading flat plate portion 7 is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12, and is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19 and the upper rising flat plate portion. It is folded back to the surface 24X side of 24.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side is lowered as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. The third bent straight line L3 (the third bent straight line L3 on the left side) and the sixth bent straight line L3 on the left side that separate the third interval P3 from the lower edge 3D of the flat plate 3 (the lower edge 3M of the fourth plate). It is bent toward the front surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 and the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12 along the above.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the right side of the upper flat plate 4 is formed by lowering the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22. The 8th folding straight line L8 (8th folding straight line L8 on the left side), the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th on the left side separating the 8th interval P8 from the upper edge 4D of the board (4K on the upper edge of the 3rd board). It is bent along the bending straight line L12 toward the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19 and the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24.
As a result, the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 on the left side of the loading flat plate portion 7 is formed along the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. It is raised to the front surface 7X side and folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12. The second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 is raised on the surface 7X side of the loading flat plate portion 7 with the third bent straight line L3 on the left side and the sixth bent straight line L6 on the left side as a boundary (boundary line), and is raised on the left side. It is folded back to the back surface 12Y side of the lower rising flat plate portion 12.
As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is along the eighth folding straight line L8 on the left side, the eleventh folding straight line L11 on the left side, and the twelfth folding straight line L12 on the left side. , It is raised to the back surface 19Y side of the presser plate portion 19, and is folded back to the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side. The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 is the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19 with the 8th bent straight line L8 on the left side, the 11th bent straight line L11 on the left side, and the 12th bent straight line L12 on the left side as boundaries (boundary lines). It is raised to the side and folded back to the surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side is between the raised upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the raised lower rising flat plate portion 12, and the raised and folded second retaining flat plate portion 12. The shaped flat plate portion 16 is arranged and raised on the back surface 19Y side of the pressing flat plate portion 19, and is folded back on the front surface 24X side of the upper rising flat plate portion 24 on the left side.
The third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26 on the left side was raised between the 11th folding straight line L11 on the left side and the 12th folding straight line L12 on the left side (13th interval P13) with the start-up and folding. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the raised and folded second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 (sixth bent straight line L5 on the left side) are arranged (positioned).

In the presser sheet 2, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the second presser sheet portion 2B is the article Z as the lower leg flat plate portions 9 and 10 and the upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 are lowered. It is pressed against (lower plate 3).
As a result, the presser sheet 2 sandwiches the article Z (product) between the first presser sheet portion 2A located inside the loading window hole 8 and the second presser sheet portion 2B located inside the presser window hole 20. And fix the article Z.
As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the loaded holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Can project from the back surface 7Y of the loaded flat plate portion 7 with the first bent straight lines L1 and L1 as the bent straight lines. , The article Z is pressed toward the second pressing sheet portion 2B.
As a result, the loading holding flat plate portions 51, 51, ... Hold the article Z on the first pressing sheet portion 2A, and sandwich the article Z with the second pressing sheet portion 2B.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, the lower rising flat plate portions 11 and 12 and the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24 have the surface 7X and the presser of the loading flat plate portion 7 from the rising angle θB. It is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19.
At this time, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 are each second bent straight line L2 and L2 and each third. Along the bent straight lines L3, L3, the fifth bent straight lines L5, L5, and the sixth bent straight lines L6, L6, at positions parallel to the back surfaces 11Y, 12Y of the lower rising flat plate portions 11, 12. It is folded back and raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are the eighth folded straight lines L8, L8, and the ninth folded one, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131. Along the curved straight lines L9, L9, the 11th bent straight lines L11, L11, the 12th bent straight lines L12, L12, the 13th bent straight lines L13, L13, and the 14th bent straight lines L14, L14, respectively. It is folded back at a position parallel to the back surfaces 23Y and 24Y of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24, and is raised at a position perpendicular to the back surface 19Y of the holding flat plate portion 19.
As a result, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the first holding flat plate portion 13, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 27 are in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 129 and 130. , Are stacked in parallel with each other. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 13 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P3). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the lower rising flat plate portion 12, the first holding flat plate portion 14, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the fourth holding flat plate portion 28 mutually in the left-right direction LR. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the first shape-retaining flat plate portion 14 are the upper rising flat plate portion 24 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 13th and 14th bent straight lines L13 and 14 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 28.
As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the lower rising flat plate portion 11, the second holding flat plate portion 15, the upper raising flat plate portion 23, and the third holding flat plate portion 25 mutually in the left-right direction LR. They are stacked in parallel. The lower rising flat plate portion 11 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 15 are the upper rising flat plate portion 23 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion between the 11th and 12th bent straight lines L11 and L11 (13th interval P13). It is folded between the parts 25.
The lower rising flat plate portion 12, the second holding flat plate portion 16, the upper raising flat plate portion 24, and the third holding flat plate portion 26 are parallel to each other in the left-right direction LR as shown in FIGS. 129 and 130.・ The lower rising flat plate portion 12 and the second shape-retaining flat plate portion 16 are arranged in an overlapping manner. It is folded between 24 and the third shape-retaining flat plate portion 26.

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower plate 3 (the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11 and 12) are respectively. When the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12 are raised at positions orthogonal to the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7, they are arranged in parallel with the surface 7X of the loading flat plate portion 7.
The 7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper plate 4 (7th plate upper edge portions 4R, 4S of the upper rising plate portions 23, 24) hold down the upper rising plate portions 23, 24, and the flat plate portion 19 When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19, it is arranged in parallel with the back surface 19Y of the presser plate portion 19.

5th plate lower edge 3N, 3Q of each lower plate 3 and 6th plate lower edge 3P, 3Q (5th plate lower edge 3N, 3O of each 1st shape-retaining flat plate 13, 14). As shown in FIG. 129, the sixth plate lower edge portions 3P, 3Q) of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15 and 16 are loaded with the first and second shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 to 16 and the flat plate portions 7. When it is raised at a position orthogonal to the surface 7X of the above, it is arranged in parallel with the lower edge portions 3R and 3S of the seventh plate of each of the lower raising flat plate portions 11 and 12.
By setting the fourth acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the first acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the lower edge portion of the fifth plate of the first shape-retaining flat plate portions 13 and 14 3N, 3O, the lower edge portions 3P, 3Q of the sixth plate of the second shape-retaining flat plate portions 15, 16 are parallel to the lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the seventh plate of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. Be placed.
Upper plate upper edge 4N, 4Q of each 5th plate and 6th plate upper edge 4P, 4Q of the upper plate 4 (5th plate upper edge 4N, 4O of each 3rd shape-retaining flat plate 25, 26, each 4th As shown in FIG. 129, the sixth plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q) of the shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 hold the third and fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 to 28 on the back surface 19Y of the flat plate portion 19. When they are raised at orthogonal positions, they are arranged in parallel with the upper edge portions 4R and 4S of the seventh plate of the upper rising flat plate portions 23 and 24.
By setting the 4th acute angle θ4 to an angle equal to or greater than half the angle of the 1st acute angle θ1 [θ4 ≧ (1/2) × θ1], the upper edge 4N of the 5th plate of the 3rd shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 , 4O, the 6th plate upper edge portions 4P, 4Q of each of the 4th shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 are arranged in parallel with the 7th plate lower edge portions 3R, 3S of the lower rising plate portions 11, 12 respectively. To.
As a result, the packing cushioning material X6 is assembled by packing the article Z (commodity).

As shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, the packing cushioning material X6 (hereinafter referred to as “assembled and packed packing cushioning material X3”) assembled by packing the article Z (commodity) is transported (transported). It is stored in the rectangular packing box B.
As shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X6 is stored in the packing box B from the back surface 7Y side of the loading flat plate portion 7.
As shown in FIG. 134, the assembled and packed packing cushioning material X6 includes the first and second lower leg flat plate portions 9, 10 and the first and second upper leg flat plate portions 21 and 22 (on the plate of the lower flat plate 3). The edge 3A and the lower edge 3B of the plate, the upper edge 4A of the upper plate 4 and the lower edge 4B of the plate) are in contact with the bottom plate 101 of the packing box B. It is stored in the packing box B.
Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the packing cushioning material X6 assembled and packed includes the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25 and 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27 and 28 in the side flat plate 52 of the packing box B. It abuts on 52 and is stored in the packing box B.
Subsequently, the lid flat plate 53 of the packing box B is closed, and the lid flat plate 53 is brought into contact with the raised lower raising plate portions 11 and 12 and the raised upper rising flat plates 23 and 24. And carry it.
At this time, the packed cushioning material X3 that has been assembled and packed abuts the third shape-retaining flat plate portions 25, 26 and the fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions 27, 28 on the side flat plates 52, 52 of the packing box B. , The assembly of the packing cushioning material X6 is not opened (deployed), the falling angles θA of the first and second lower leg flat plates 9 and 10, and the standing of the first and second upper leg flat plates 21 and 22. The lowering angle θA is maintained.

In the packing cushioning materials X1, X2, X4, and X5, it has been described that the loading window hole 8 and the holding window hole 20 are formed in a rectangular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the loading window hole 8 and the holding window hole 20 are formed in a rectangular shape, a circular shape, or the like. You may.
The packing cushioning materials X2 and X3 have described the configuration in which the presser foot reinforcing flat plate 36 (each presser foot reinforcing flat plate portion 42 and the presser foot cut straight line LN) is provided in the presser window hole 20, but the presser foot is not limited thereto. A configuration in which the presser reinforcing flat plate 36 is not provided in the window hole 20 (a configuration in which the loading reinforcing flat plate 35 is provided only in the loading window hole 8) can also be adopted.
In the packing cushioning materials X3 and X6, it has been described that the presser window hole 20 is formed into a rectangular shape (rectangular shape), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the presser window hole 20 may be formed into a polygonal shape, a circular shape, or the like.

The present invention is most suitable for packing and transporting an article (commodity).

X1 Cushioning material for packing 1 Basic flat plate 2 Presser sheet 2A 1st presser sheet 2B 2nd presser sheet 3 Lower plate 4 Upper plate 7 Loading plate 8 Loading window hole 9 1st lower leg plate 10 2nd lower Side leg flat plate portion 11 Lower rising flat plate portion (right side)
12 Lower rising flat plate (left)
13 First shape-retaining flat plate (right side)
14 First shape-retaining flat plate (left side)
15 Second shape-retaining flat plate (right side)
16 Second shape-retaining flat plate (left side)
19 Presser flat plate portion 20 Presser window hole 21 First upper leg flat plate portion 22 Second upper leg flat plate portion 23 Upper rising flat plate portion (right side)
24 Upper rising flat plate (left side)
25 Third shape-retaining flat plate (right side)
26 Third shape-retaining flat plate (left side)
27 4th shape-retaining flat plate (right side)
28 4th shape-retaining flat plate (left side)

Claims (8)

A packing cushioning material having a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate side edges, and comprising a foundation flat plate having a predetermined plate thickness and a presser sheet.
The foundation flat plate is
A reference bent straight line that is arranged parallel to the upper edge of the plate at intervals of the upper plate, is arranged in parallel to the lower edge of the plate at intervals of the lower plate, and intersects the side edges of each plate.
A pair of reference cut straight lines having a cut length from each plate side edge, formed on the reference bent straight line, penetrating the foundation flat plate body, and opening to the front surface and the back surface of the foundation flat plate body. Have and
A lower flat plate partitioned by the reference bending straight line, the lower edge of the plate, and the side edge of each plate,
It is composed of the reference bent straight line, the upper plate divided by the upper edge of the plate and the side edge of each plate, and the upper plate.
The side edges of each plate
A pair of plate upper edges located between the plate upper edge and the reference bending straight line, and
It has a pair of underboard edges located between the underboard edge and the reference bent straight line, and has.
The lower flat plate is
A pair of first bending straight lines arranged parallel to the lower edge of the plate and the reference bending straight line with a first spacing, and parallel to each other with a second spacing.
A pair of second folding straight lines orthogonal to the reference bending straight line and the first bending straight line and the reference notch straight line, which are arranged on the lower edge of each plate with a third spacing. When,
A pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge of the plate and the first bent straight line arranged on the lower edge of each plate at the third interval and separated by the first interval at the lower edge of the plate. ,
The second folding straight line and the third folding straight line are located between the lower edge of each plate and the lower edge of each plate at a distance of a fourth interval. A pair of fourth folding straight lines arranged in parallel with the curved straight line and each of the third folding straight lines at a fifth interval, and orthogonal to each of the first folding straight lines.
At each first intersection of the first bending straight line and each of the fourth folding straight lines separating the first interval from the reference bending straight line, each fourth folding straight line is formed with a first acute angle. A pair of fifth bent straight lines extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate.
At each second intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , the fourth acute angle is formed on each of the fourth bent straight lines. It has a reference bent straight line extending from each of the second intersections and a pair of sixth bent straight lines extending toward the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate.
A loading flat plate portion partitioned by each of the first bent straight lines and each of the fourth bent straight lines,
A loading window hole formed in the loading flat plate portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion through the loading flat plate portion.
The reference bent straight line, the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the reference bent straight line, and the second bent straight line, and the first interval separated from the reference bent straight line. The first lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the first bending straight line, and the first lower leg flat plate portion.
The lower edge of the plate is partitioned by the first bending straight line separating the first interval and each of the third folding straight lines, and the lower edge of the plate is separated by the first bending straight line. The second lower leg flat plate portion that can be hung on the back surface side of the loading flat surface portion,
A pair that is divided by each of the 4th folding straight lines, the 5th folding straight lines, and the 6th folding straight lines, and is raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the 4th folding straight lines. The lower rising flat plate part and
It is divided by each of the second folding straight lines and the fifth folding straight lines, and is folded back along the respective second folding straight lines and the respective fifth folding straight lines to the back surface of the lower rising flat plate portion . A pair of first shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion and
It is divided by each of the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines, and is folded back along the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. It is composed of a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised and raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion.
The upper flat plate is
The surface of the upper plate is directed toward the surface of the lower plate, and the surface of the lower plate is folded back along the reference bending straight line to the surface of the lower plate.
A pair of seventh bent straight lines arranged in parallel with the upper edge of the plate and the reference bent straight line with a sixth interval, and parallel to each other with a seventh interval.
It is arranged at the upper edge of each plate with an eighth interval, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the second bent straight lines, and is separated from the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate with the sixth interval. A pair of 8th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line,
The sixth plate is arranged on the upper edge of each plate at an interval of the eighth distance, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the second bent straight lines, and is located on the reference cut straight line and the reference bent straight line. A pair of 9th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line, which are spaced apart from each other,
The 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located on the upper edge of each plate at a distance of 9th, and the 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located between the upper edge of each plate and the 8th folding straight line. And a pair of tenth folding straight lines arranged parallel to each of the ninth folding straight lines at a tenth interval and orthogonal to each of the seventh folding straight lines.
At each of the first base points on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the upper edge of the plate and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the upper edge of the plate. A pair of eleventh lines extending from each first base point toward the reference bending straight line and the upper edge of each plate at a second acute angle to the tenth bending straight line and intersecting the upper edge of each plate. Folded straight line and
It is located between the 11th bent straight line and the upper edge of the plate, and is arranged parallel to each of the 11th bent straight lines with a thirteenth interval equal to or larger than the plate thickness. A pair of 12th folding straight lines that intersect the 8th folding straight line,
At each second base point on an extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the reference folding straight line and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the reference folding straight line. A pair of first points extending from each of the second base points toward the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of the plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate with the second acute angle formed on each tenth bending straight line. 13 bent straight lines and
Located between the reference bending straight line and each of the thirteenth folding straight lines, the thirteenth folding straight line is arranged in parallel with the thirteenth interval, and the upper edge of each plate and each of the ninth folding straight lines are arranged in parallel. It has a pair of 14th bent straight lines that intersect the straight lines,
A presser plate portion partitioned by each of the 7th bent straight lines and each of the 10th bent straight lines,
A presser window hole formed in the presser plate portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion through the presser plate portion.
Along the 7th folding straight line that is partitioned by the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate and the 8th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate. A first upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and is overlapped on the surface of the second lower leg flat plate portion that is erected.
The 7th folding straight line separated by the 6th interval from the reference bending straight line and the 9th folding straight line separated from each of the 9th bending straight lines, and the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval from the reference bending straight line. A second upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion along the surface and is overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg plate portion that has been erected.
It is divided by each of the tenth folding straight lines, the eleventh folding straight line and the thirteenth folding straight line, and is raised on the back surface side of the holding plate portion along the tenth folding straight line. A pair of upper rising flat plates stacked on the surface of each raised flat plate, and
Each upper standing along the 8th folding straight line, the 11th folding straight line, and the 12th folding straight line, which is divided by the 8th folding straight line and the 11th folding straight line. The lower raised flat plate portions, which are folded back on the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised flat plate portions and the upper raised flat plate portions . A pair of third shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the folded and raised second shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and overlapped with each other.
Each upper standing along the 9th folding straight line, the 13th folding straight line, and the 14th folding straight line, which is divided by the 9th folding straight line and the 13th folding straight line. Each lower rising flat plate portion folded back to the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised to the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised upper raising flat plate portions and the raised flat plate portions, folded and folded. It is composed of a pair of fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the raised first shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and stacked.
The presser sheet is
A first presser sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the loading flat plate portion, covers the loading window hole, and is fixed to the lower flat plate portion.
A packing cushioning material having a second presser sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the presser plate portion and is fixed to the upper flat plate so as to cover the presser window hole.

A loading reinforcing flat plate is provided which is continuously provided to the loading flat plate portion along the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole.
The loading window hole is
The loading window hole portion is provided inside the loading window hole edge, and the loading window hole portion is provided.
The load reinforcing flat plate is
It is composed of a plurality of loading reinforcing flat plate portions extending between the loading window hole edge and the loading window hole portion and partitioned by a plurality of loading cut lines.
Each of the loading cut lines is
2. Cushioning material for packing. A presser foot reinforcing flat plate is provided which is continuously provided to the presser plate portion along the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole.
The presser window hole is
The presser window hole portion is provided inside the presser window hole edge, and the presser window hole portion is provided.
The presser foot reinforcing flat plate is
It is composed of a plurality of presser reinforcing flat plate portions extending between the presser window hole edge and the presser window hole portion and partitioned by a plurality of presser cut lines.
Each of the presser foot cut lines
2. Cushioning material for packing. A packing cushioning material having a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate side edges, and comprising a foundation flat plate having a predetermined plate thickness and a presser sheet.
The foundation flat plate is
A reference bent straight line that is arranged parallel to the upper edge of the plate at intervals of the upper plate, is arranged in parallel to the lower edge of the plate at intervals of the lower plate, and intersects the side edges of each plate.
A pair of reference cut straight lines having a cut length from each plate side edge, formed on the reference bent straight line, penetrating the foundation flat plate body, and opening to the front surface and the back surface of the foundation flat plate body. Have and
A lower flat plate partitioned by the reference bending straight line, the lower edge of the plate, and the side edge of each plate,
It is composed of the reference bent straight line, the upper plate divided by the upper edge of the plate and the side edge of each plate, and the upper plate.
The side edges of each plate
A pair of plate upper edges located between the plate upper edge and the reference bending straight line, and
It has a pair of underboard edges located between the underboard edge and the reference bent straight line, and has.
The lower flat plate is
A pair of first bending straight lines arranged in parallel with the lower edge of the plate and the reference bending straight line with a first spacing, and parallel to each other with a second spacing.
A pair of second folding straight lines orthogonal to the reference bending straight line and the first bending straight line and the reference notch straight line, which are arranged on the lower edge of each plate with a third spacing. When,
A pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge of the plate and the first bent straight line arranged on the lower edge of each plate at the third interval and separated by the first interval at the lower edge of the plate. ,
The second folding straight line and the third folding straight line are located between the lower edge of each plate and the lower edge of each plate at a distance of a fourth interval. A pair of fourth folding straight lines arranged in parallel with the curved straight line and each of the third folding straight lines at a fifth interval, and orthogonal to each of the first folding straight lines.
At each first intersection of the first bending straight line and each of the fourth folding straight lines separating the first interval from the reference bending straight line, each fourth folding straight line is formed with a first acute angle. A pair of fifth bent straight lines extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate.
At each second intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , the fourth acute angle is formed on each of the fourth bent straight lines. It has a reference bent straight line extending from each of the second intersections and a pair of sixth bent straight lines extending toward the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate.
A loading flat plate portion partitioned by each of the first bent straight lines and each of the fourth bent straight lines,
A plurality of loading holdings formed on the loading flat plate portion, penetrating the loading flat plate portion with a notch interval from each other, and partitioned by a plurality of holding cutting lines opened on the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion. Flat plate and
The reference bent straight line, the first bent straight line separating the first interval from the reference bent straight line, and the second bent straight line, and the first interval separated from the reference bent straight line. The first lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the first bending straight line, and the first lower leg flat plate portion.
The lower edge of the plate is partitioned by the first bending straight line separating the first interval and each of the third folding straight lines, and the lower edge of the plate is separated by the first bending straight line. The second lower leg flat plate portion that can be hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion,
A pair that is divided by each of the 4th folding straight lines, the 5th folding straight lines, and the 6th folding straight lines, and is raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the 4th folding straight lines. The lower rising flat plate part and
It is divided by each of the second folding straight lines and the fifth folding straight lines, and is folded back along the respective second folding straight lines and the respective fifth folding straight lines to the back surface of the lower rising flat plate portion . A pair of first shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion and
It is divided by each of the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines, and is folded back along the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. It is composed of a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised and raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion.
The upper flat plate is
The surface of the upper plate is directed toward the surface of the lower plate, and the surface of the lower plate is folded back along the reference bending straight line to the surface of the lower plate.
A pair of seventh bent straight lines arranged in parallel with the upper edge of the plate and the reference bent straight line with a sixth interval, and parallel to each other with a seventh interval.
It is arranged at the upper edge of each plate with an eighth interval, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the second bent straight lines, and is separated from the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate with the sixth interval. A pair of 8th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line,
The sixth plate is arranged on the upper edge of each plate at an interval of the eighth distance, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the second bent straight lines, and is located on the reference cut straight line and the reference bent straight line. A pair of 9th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line, which are spaced apart from each other,
The 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located on the upper edge of each plate at a distance of 9th, and the 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located between the upper edge of each plate and the 8th folding straight line. And a pair of tenth folding straight lines arranged parallel to each of the ninth folding straight lines at a tenth interval and orthogonal to each of the seventh folding straight lines.
At each of the first base points on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the upper edge of the plate and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the upper edge of the plate. A pair of eleventh lines extending from each first base point toward the reference bending straight line and the upper edge of each plate at a second acute angle to the tenth bending straight line and intersecting the upper edge of each plate. Folded straight line and
It is located between the 11th bent straight line and the upper edge of the plate, and is arranged parallel to each of the 11th bent straight lines with a thirteenth interval equal to or larger than the plate thickness. A pair of 12th folding straight lines that intersect the 8th folding straight line,
At each second base point on an extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the reference folding straight line and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the reference folding straight line. A pair of first points extending from each of the second base points toward the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of the plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate with the second acute angle formed on each tenth bending straight line. 13 bent straight lines and
Located between the reference bending straight line and each of the thirteenth folding straight lines, the thirteenth folding straight line is arranged in parallel with the thirteenth interval, and the upper edge of each plate and each of the ninth folding straight lines are arranged in parallel. It has a pair of 14th bent straight lines that intersect the straight lines,
A presser plate portion partitioned by each of the 7th bent straight lines and each of the 10th bent straight lines,
A presser window hole formed in the presser plate portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion through the presser plate portion.
Along the 7th folding straight line that is partitioned by the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate and the 8th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate. A first upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and is overlapped on the surface of the second lower leg flat plate portion that has been erected.
The 7th folding straight line separated by the 6th interval from the reference bending straight line and the 9th folding straight line separated from each of the 9th bending straight lines, and the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval from the reference bending straight line. A second upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion along the surface and is overlapped with the surface of the first lower leg plate portion that has been erected.
It is divided by each of the tenth folding straight lines, the eleventh folding straight line and the thirteenth folding straight line, and is raised on the back surface side of the holding plate portion along the tenth folding straight line. A pair of upper rising flat plates stacked on the surface of each raised flat plate, and
Each upper standing along the 8th folding straight line, the 11th folding straight line, and the 12th folding straight line, which is divided by the 8th folding straight line and the 11th folding straight line. The lower raised flat plate portions, which are folded back on the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised flat plate portions and the upper raised flat plate portions . A pair of third shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the folded and raised second shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and overlapped with each other.
Each upper standing along the 9th folding straight line, the 13th folding straight line, and the 14th folding straight line, which is divided by the 9th folding straight line and the 13th folding straight line. Each lower rising flat plate portion folded back to the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised to the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised upper raising flat plate portions and the raised flat plate portions, folded and folded. It is composed of a pair of fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the raised first shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and stacked.
The presser sheet is
A first pressing sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is fixed to the lower flat plate by covering each of the loading and holding flat plate portions.
A packing cushioning material having a second presser sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the presser plate portion and is fixed to the upper flat plate so as to cover the presser window hole.
It has a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate upper edges, and has an upper plate having a predetermined plate thickness, a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate lower side edges, and has the plate thickness lower plate. And a cushioning material for packing, which is provided with a presser sheet.
The lower flat plate is
A pair of first bent straight lines arranged parallel to the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate with a first spacing and parallel to each other with a second spacing.
The first bent straight line and the pair of second bent straight lines orthogonal to the upper edge of the plate, which are arranged at the lower edge of each plate at a third interval and are separated by the first interval at the upper edge of the plate,
A pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge of the plate and the first bent straight line arranged on the lower edge of each plate at the third interval and separated by the first interval at the lower edge of the plate. ,
The second folding straight line and the third folding straight line are located between the lower edge of each plate and the lower edge of each plate at a distance of a fourth interval. A pair of fourth folding straight lines arranged in parallel with the curved straight line and each of the third folding straight lines at a fifth interval, and orthogonal to each of the first folding straight lines.
At each first intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval from the upper edge of the plate, the fourth bent straight line is formed with a first acute angle. A pair of fifth bent straight lines extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate.
At each second intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , the fourth acute angle is formed on each of the fourth bent straight lines. It has a pair of sixth bent straight lines extending from each of the second intersections toward the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edges of each plate.
A loading flat plate portion partitioned by each of the first bent straight lines and each of the fourth bent straight lines,
A loading window hole formed in the loading flat plate portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion through the loading flat plate portion.
The first fold is partitioned by the upper edge of the plate, the first bending straight line separating the first interval from the upper edge of the plate, and the second folding straight line, and the first interval is separated from the upper edge of the plate. The first lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along a curved straight line, and
Along the first bending straight line that is partitioned by the first bending straight line that separates the first interval from the lower edge of the plate and the third folding straight line that separates the first spacing from the lower edge of the plate. The second lower leg flat plate portion that can be hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion, and
A pair that is divided by each of the 4th folding straight lines, the 5th folding straight lines, and the 6th folding straight lines, and is raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the 4th folding straight lines. The lower rising flat plate part and
It is divided by each of the second folding straight lines and the fifth folding straight lines, and is folded back along the respective second folding straight lines and the respective fifth folding straight lines to the back surface of the lower rising flat plate portion . A pair of first shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion and
It is divided by each of the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines, and is folded back along the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. It is composed of a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised and raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion.
The upper flat plate is
The surface of the upper plate is directed toward the surface of the lower plate, and the surface of the lower plate is loaded.
A pair of seventh bent straight lines arranged parallel to the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate with a sixth interval and parallel to each other with a seventh interval.
It is arranged at the upper edge of each plate with an eighth interval, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the second bent straight lines, and is separated from the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate with the sixth interval. A pair of 8th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line,
The sixth interval is arranged on the upper edge of each plate at a distance of the eighth interval, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and the second bending straight line, and the sixth interval is provided on the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate. A pair of 9th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line, which are separated from each other,
The 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located on the upper edge of each plate at a distance of 9th, and the 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located between the upper edge of each plate and the 8th folding straight line. And a pair of tenth folding straight lines arranged parallel to each of the ninth folding straight lines at a tenth interval and orthogonal to each of the seventh folding straight lines.
At each of the first base points on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the upper edge of the plate and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the upper edge of the plate. A pair of eleventh folds extending from each first base point toward the lower edge of the plate and the upper edge of each plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate at a second acute angle on the tenth folding straight line. Curved straight line and
It is located between the 11th bent straight line and the upper edge of the plate, and is arranged parallel to each of the 11th bent straight lines with a thirteenth interval equal to or larger than the plate thickness. A pair of 12th folding straight lines that intersect the 8th folding straight line,
At each second base point on an extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the lower edge of the plate and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the lower edge of the plate, each of the first. A pair of thirteenth folds extending from each of the second base points toward the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of the plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate with the second acute angle formed in a 10-fold straight line. Curved straight line and
It is located between the lower edge of the plate and each of the thirteenth folding straight lines, and is arranged parallel to each of the thirteenth folding straight lines with the thirteenth interval between them. With a pair of 14th folding straight lines intersecting with,
A presser plate portion partitioned by each of the 7th bent straight lines and each of the 10th bent straight lines,
A presser window hole formed in the presser plate portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion through the presser plate portion.
Along the 7th folding straight line that is partitioned by the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate and the 8th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate. A first upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and is overlapped on the surface of the second lower leg flat plate portion that is erected.
The lower edge of the plate is partitioned by the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval and each of the 9th folding straight lines, and the lower edge of the plate is separated by the 6th interval along the 7th folding straight line. A second upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and is overlapped on the surface of the first lower leg plate portion that has been erected.
It is divided by each of the tenth folding straight lines, the eleventh folding straight line and the thirteenth folding straight line, and is raised on the back surface side of the holding plate portion along the tenth folding straight line. A pair of upper rising flat plates stacked on the surface of each raised flat plate, and
Each upper standing along the 8th folding straight line, the 11th folding straight line, and the 12th folding straight line, which is divided by the 8th folding straight line and the 11th folding straight line. The lower raised flat plate portions, which are folded back on the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised flat plate portions and the upper raised flat plate portions . A pair of third shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the folded and raised second shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and overlapped with each other.
Each upper standing along the 9th folding straight line, the 13th folding straight line, and the 14th folding straight line, which is divided by the 9th folding straight line and the 13th folding straight line. Each lower rising flat plate portion folded back to the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised to the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised upper raising flat plate portions and the raised flat plate portions, folded and folded. It is composed of a pair of fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the raised first shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and stacked.
The presser sheet is
A first presser sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is fixed to the lower flat plate portion so as to cover the loading window hole.
A packing cushioning material having a second presser sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the presser plate portion and is fixed to the upper flat plate so as to cover the presser window hole.
A loading reinforcing flat plate is provided which is continuously provided to the loading flat plate portion along the loading window hole edge of the loading window hole.
The loading window hole is
The loading window hole portion is provided inside the loading window hole edge, and the loading window hole portion is provided.
The load reinforcing flat plate is
It is composed of a plurality of loading reinforcing flat plate portions extending between the loading window hole edge and the loading window hole portion and partitioned by a plurality of loading cut lines.
Each of the loading cut lines is
The fifth aspect of claim 5, wherein the loading window hole extends from the loading window hole edge and is opened in the loading window hole portion, and the loading reinforcing flat plate is penetrated and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the loading reinforcing flat plate. Cushioning material for packing. A presser foot reinforcing flat plate is provided which is continuously provided to the presser plate portion along the presser window hole edge of the presser window hole.
The presser window hole is
The presser window hole portion is provided inside the presser window hole edge, and the presser window hole portion is provided.
The presser foot reinforcing flat plate is
It is composed of a plurality of presser reinforcing flat plate portions extending between the presser window hole edge and the presser window hole portion and partitioned by a plurality of presser cut lines.
Each of the presser foot cut lines
The sixth aspect of claim 6 is characterized in that it extends from the edge of the presser window hole and is opened in the presser window hole portion, and penetrates the presser reinforcing flat plate to open on the front surface and the back surface of the presser reinforcing flat plate. Cushioning material for packing. It has a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate upper edges, and has an upper plate having a predetermined plate thickness, a plate upper edge, a plate lower edge, and left and right plate lower side edges, and has the plate thickness lower plate. And a cushioning material for packing that includes a presser sheet,
The lower flat plate is
A pair of first bent straight lines arranged parallel to the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate with a first spacing and parallel to each other with a second spacing.
The first bent straight line and the pair of second bent straight lines orthogonal to the upper edge of the plate, which are arranged at the lower edge of each plate at a third interval and are separated by the first interval at the upper edge of the plate,
A pair of third bent straight lines orthogonal to the lower edge of the plate and the first bent straight line arranged on the lower edge of each plate at the third interval and separated by the first interval at the lower edge of the plate. ,
The second folding straight line and the third folding straight line are located between the lower edge of each plate and the lower edge of each plate at a distance of a fourth interval. A pair of fourth folding straight lines arranged in parallel with the curved straight line and each of the third folding straight lines at a fifth interval, and orthogonal to each of the first folding straight lines.
At each first intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval from the upper edge of the plate, the fourth bent straight line is formed with a first acute angle. A pair of fifth bent straight lines extending from each first intersection toward the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edge of each plate.
At each second intersection of the first bent straight line and each of the fourth bent straight lines separating the first interval from the lower edge of the plate , the fourth acute angle is formed on each of the fourth bent straight lines. It has a pair of sixth bent straight lines extending from each of the second intersections toward the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of each plate and intersecting the lower edges of each plate.
A loading flat plate portion partitioned by each of the first bent straight lines and each of the fourth bent straight lines,
A plurality of loading holdings formed on the loading flat plate portion, penetrating the loading flat plate portion with a notch interval from each other, and partitioned by a plurality of holding cutting lines opened on the front surface and the back surface of the loading flat plate portion. Flat plate and
The first fold is partitioned by the upper edge of the plate, the first bending straight line separating the first interval from the upper edge of the plate, and the second folding straight line, and the first interval is separated from the upper edge of the plate. The first lower leg flat plate portion that is hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion along a curved straight line, and
The lower edge of the plate is partitioned by the first bending straight line separating the first interval and each of the third folding straight lines, and the lower edge of the plate is separated by the first bending straight line. The second lower leg flat plate portion that can be hung on the back surface side of the loading flat plate portion,
A pair that is divided by each of the 4th folding straight lines, the 5th folding straight lines, and the 6th folding straight lines, and is raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion along the 4th folding straight lines. The lower rising flat plate part and
It is divided by each of the second folding straight lines and the fifth folding straight lines, and is folded back along the respective second folding straight lines and the respective fifth folding straight lines to the back surface of the lower rising flat plate portion . A pair of first shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion and
It is divided by each of the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines, and is folded back along the 3rd folding straight lines and the 6th folding straight lines to the back surface of each lower rising flat plate portion. It is composed of a pair of second shape-retaining flat plate portions that are raised and raised on the surface side of the loading flat plate portion.
The upper flat plate is
The surface of the upper plate is directed toward the surface of the lower plate, and the surface of the lower plate is loaded.
A pair of seventh bent straight lines arranged parallel to the upper edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate with a sixth interval and parallel to each other with a seventh interval.
It is arranged at the upper edge of each plate with an eighth interval, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and each of the second bent straight lines, and is separated from the upper edge of the plate and the upper edge of the plate with the sixth interval. A pair of 8th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line,
The sixth interval is arranged on the upper edge of each plate at a distance of the eighth interval, and is located between the upper edge of each plate and the second bending straight line, and the sixth interval is provided on the lower edge of the plate and the lower edge of the plate. A pair of 9th folding straight lines orthogonal to the 7th folding straight line, which are separated from each other,
The 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located on the upper edge of each plate at a distance of 9th, and the 8th folding straight line and the 9th folding straight line are located between the upper edge of each plate and the 8th folding straight line. And a pair of tenth folding straight lines arranged parallel to each of the ninth folding straight lines at a tenth interval and orthogonal to each of the seventh folding straight lines.
At each of the first base points on the extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the upper edge of the plate and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the upper edge of the plate. A pair of eleventh folds extending from each first base point toward the lower edge of the plate and the upper edge of each plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate at a second acute angle on the tenth folding straight line. Curved straight line and
It is located between the 11th bent straight line and the upper edge of the plate, and is arranged parallel to each of the 11th bent straight lines with a thirteenth interval equal to or larger than the plate thickness. A pair of 12th folding straight lines that intersect the 8th folding straight line,
At each second base point on an extension of each of the tenth folding straight lines extending between the lower edge of the plate and the seventh folding straight line separating the sixth interval from the lower edge of the plate, each of the first. A pair of thirteenth folds extending from each of the second base points toward the upper edge of each plate and the upper edge of the plate and intersecting the upper edge of each plate with the second acute angle formed in a 10-fold straight line. Curved straight line and
It is located between the lower edge of the plate and each of the thirteenth folding straight lines, and is arranged parallel to each of the thirteenth folding straight lines with the thirteenth interval between them. With a pair of 14th folding straight lines that intersect with,
A presser plate portion partitioned by each of the 7th bent straight lines and each of the 10th bent straight lines,
A presser window hole formed in the presser plate portion and opened on the front surface and the back surface of the presser plate portion through the presser plate portion.
Along the 7th folding straight line that is partitioned by the 7th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate and the 8th folding straight line that separates the 6th interval from the upper edge of the plate. A first upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and is overlapped on the surface of the second lower leg flat plate portion that is erected.
The lower edge of the plate is partitioned by the 7th folding straight line separating the 6th interval and each of the 9th folding straight lines, and the lower edge of the plate is separated by the 6th interval along the 7th folding straight line. A second upper leg plate portion that is hung on the surface side of the presser plate portion and is overlapped on the surface of the first lower leg plate portion that has been erected.
It is divided by each of the tenth folding straight lines, the eleventh folding straight line and the thirteenth folding straight line, and is raised on the back surface side of the holding plate portion along the tenth folding straight line. A pair of upper rising flat plates stacked on the surface of each raised flat plate, and
Each upper standing along the 8th folding straight line, the 11th folding straight line, and the 12th folding straight line, which is divided by the 8th folding straight line and the 11th folding straight line. The lower raised flat plate portions, which are folded back on the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised on the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised flat plate portions and the upper raised flat plate portions . A pair of third shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the folded and raised second shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and overlapped with each other.
Each upper standing along the 9th folding straight line, the 13th folding straight line, and the 14th folding straight line, which is divided by the 9th folding straight line and the 13th folding straight line. Each lower raised flat plate portion folded back to the surface of the raised flat plate portion and raised to the back surface side of the holding flat plate portion, and raised between the raised flat plate portions and the upper raised flat plate portions, folded and folded. It is composed of a pair of fourth shape-retaining flat plate portions on which the raised first shape-retaining flat plate portions are arranged and stacked.
The presser sheet is
A first pressing sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the loading flat plate portion and is fixed to the lower flat plate by covering each of the loading and holding flat plate portions.
A packing cushioning material having a second presser sheet portion that is loaded on the surface of the presser plate portion and is fixed to the upper flat plate so as to cover the presser window hole.

Images